JP2018047345A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of outputting a voice in consideration of an interest of a player.SOLUTION: When a double ready-to-win is displayed, a voice lamp control device 114 outputs a probability variation ready-to-win voice corresponding to a ready-to-win pattern which establishes a probability variation ready-to-win when receiving the probability variation pattern ready-to-win display command. At the time, a value of a counter 223c in ready-to-win voice reproduction becomes 1. Then the voice lamp control device 114 outputs a normal ready-to-win voice corresponding to a ready-to-win pattern which establishes a normal ready-to-win when receiving a normal pattern ready-to-win display command. At the time, a normal ready-to-win voice is configured so that a silent section is reproduced for first 20 milliseconds. In addition, the value of the counter 223c in ready-to-win voice reproduction becomes 2. The voice lamp control device 114 stops reproduction of the normal ready-to-win voice whose reproduction is later started, when the value of the counter 223c in ready-to-win voice reproduction becomes 2. Therefore, it is possible to make a player hear only the probability variation ready-to-win voice.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variation effects are displayed on a display device to improve the interest of the game.

JP 2008-272159 A

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, audio output is not necessarily performed for the effect image displayed on the display device in consideration of the player's interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform voice output in consideration of the interest of the player.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the sub-control means. Display means for performing a fluctuating effect accompanied by a dynamic display of the identification information and a sound output means for outputting sound, and the identification information is displayed in advance by the fluctuating effect performed by the display means. A predetermined game value is given to the player when stopped in the mode, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode by the changing effect performed by the display means in the gaming machine. The first game value is given to the player as a predetermined game value, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode by the variation effect performed by the display means. As the predetermined game value The second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the game value of the game is given, and the fact that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the first display mode as an effect mode of the variation effect performed by the display means is shown. The first effect mode, the second effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the second display mode, the first effect mode, and the second effect mode are shown simultaneously. The first sound output when the variation effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display means, as the sound output by the sound output means, Second sound output when the varying effect is performed in the second effect mode by the display means, and the first sound is silent for a predetermined time after the output of the sound is started. A sound of a state is output, and the sub-control means includes: Display control means for controlling the display in the display means, and sound control means for controlling the output of sound in the sound output means, wherein the display control means displays information indicating the display content on the display means in the sound. A notification means for notifying to the control means, the notification means, when performing the variation effect in the third effect mode in the display means, first as the information indicating the display content on the display means, The information indicating the second effect mode is notified to the voice control unit, and then the information indicating the first effect mode is notified to the voice control unit. The voice control unit is configured to transmit the information from the notification unit. When the information indicating the second effect mode is notified, when the information indicating the first effect mode is notified from the notification unit and the means for starting the output of the second sound, Means for starting the output of the first sound; means for determining whether or not the second sound is output after the output of the first sound is started; and the second sound by the means. Means for stopping the output of the first sound until the predetermined time elapses after the output of the first sound is started.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for performing control based on the control signal from the main control means, and the control of the identification information by the control of the sub-control means. A display means for performing a fluctuating effect accompanied by a visual display, and a voice output means for outputting a sound, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by a fluctuating effect performed by the display means. A predetermined game value is given to the player, and the gaming machine gives the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode by the variation effect performed by the display means. When the first game value is given as the predetermined game value and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode by the variation effect performed by the display means, the first game value is given to the player as the predetermined game value. Player than the game value of 1 A first effect mode that gives an advantageous second game value and indicates that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the first display mode, as a mode of variation effect performed by the display means; A second presentation mode indicating that there is a possibility that the second display mode may be stopped, and a third presentation mode simultaneously showing the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. As the sound output by the sound output means, the first sound that is output when the change effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display means, and the change effect is generated by the display means. Second sound that is output when performed in the second presentation mode, and the first sound outputs sound in a silent state for a predetermined time after the start of sound output. Yes, the sub-control means displays on the display means A display control means for controlling, and a voice control means for controlling the output of voice in the voice output means, wherein the display control means notifies the voice control means of information indicating display contents on the display means. Means for displaying the second effect mode as information indicating the display content on the display means when the display device performs the variation effect in the third effect mode. Information is notified to the sound control means, and then information indicating the first effect mode is notified to the sound control means, and the sound control means changes the second effect mode from the notification means. When the information indicating is notified, the means for starting the output of the second sound and the information indicating the first effect mode are notified by the notification means, and the output of the first sound is output. Open Means for starting, means for determining whether or not the second sound is output after the output of the first sound is started, and it is determined that the second sound is output by the means. Means for stopping the output of the first sound until the predetermined time elapses after the output of the first sound is started, so that the sound output considering the interest of the player There is an effect that can be performed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen and effective line setting of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) shows the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus when double reach is materialized. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in a main controller, (b) showed typically the various data stored in ROM in a main controller. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters of a main controller, various reservation ball storage areas, and various reservation ball execution areas. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot random number table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table, (c) is the variation pattern table for jackpots FIG. 6D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 9E is a diagram of a variation (probability) variation pattern table. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in ROM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the sound lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a batting direction instruction screen for instructing a player to “left strike”, and (b) is a batting ball instructing the player to “right hit”. It is the schematic diagram which showed the direction instruction screen typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the right-handed / left-handed determination process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the right-handed / left-handed determination process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing a right strike when the gaming state is in the process of changing probability or in a short time, (a) It is the figure which showed the example when only two spheres passed the 1st through gate 67 in 10 seconds, (b), the ball passed through the 1st through gate 67 in 10 seconds. It is the figure which showed the example in the case of having performed. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating reproduction | regeneration of reach sound in case a double reach is displayed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reproduction | regeneration of reach sound when a double reach is displayed in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is a single reach of a probability variation reach in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reproduction | regeneration of reach sound in the case of being displayed. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating reproduction | regeneration of reach sound in case a double reach is displayed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating reproduction | regeneration of reach sound in case a double reach is displayed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIG. 1 to FIG. 30, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and is associated with entering a first entrance 64 (start-start prize) to be described later. Various effects, such as fluctuating effects and reach effects, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a “sea stage” with a motif of the shallow sea, a “palace stage” with a submarine palace as a motif, a “deep sea stage” with a deep sea as a motif are prepared as stages. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the changing effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

  In addition, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, General winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display unit 80 Etc., and its peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb which are light emitting means.

  The first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Has been. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether or not it is fluctuating by a lighting state, and a stop pattern is definitely changed. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the off symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to having entered into the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  As will be described in detail later, during probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed. A longer time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first entry port 64 and a second entry port 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display units 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays three symbols in a variable manner, and the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 passing through the sphere as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that variably display two symbols. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbol rows of upper, middle and lower. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the effective line setting. FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when so-called double reach is established.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display region Dm that displays the third symbol variably over almost the entire area of the screen. In addition, in the lower center of the main display area Dm, the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are reserved. A hold display area Db for displaying the number of balls is provided.

  The third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm includes 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols (turtle, shark, dugong, angelfish, etc.) corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”, and It is composed of one type of sub-pattern (in this embodiment, a picture of a shell) that is smaller than the main symbol. These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub symbols between the main symbols.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is detected, a jackpot lottery is performed, and the 3rd symbol is combined with the variation display on the 1st symbol display device 37 (LED 37a). In the display device 81, the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol is executed. The variation effect is performed so that the main symbol and the sub symbol are scrolled (rightwardly scrolled) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity for each symbol row. As shown in FIG. 4, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three stages, left, middle, and right, for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). . Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In addition, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4A, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  In the pachinko machine 10, if a combination of jackpot symbols (for example, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 at the time of stopping the fluctuating effect of scrolling horizontally in each game, the jackpot A jackpot video is displayed.

  That is, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display (variable effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is performed, and the variable effect ends. After that, it is configured to generate a jackpot. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot end (in the case of probability variation jackpot), a variation effect in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “probability variation symbols”) are arranged is performed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the jackpot is ended (in the case of a normal jackpot), a variation effect is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “normal symbols”) are aligned.

  The variation effect is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Then, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the same main symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. In the case where it is determined that the reach has been established, a screen for notifying that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound output device 226 provided on the pachinko machine 10 for the sound indicating the reach (see FIG. 5). ) Is output. Here, “reach” represents a state in which, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may be generated depending on the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order in the upper symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbol are displayed in the lower symbol row Z3. Since they are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, as shown in FIG. 4B, at the stage where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the left and middle symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are displayed.・ The 3rd row of 3rd symbols on the right may be reversed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 4B, in the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbol (Dugong) “7”, the sub symbol (shellfish), and the main symbol (shark) “6” are arranged in order from the left. In the lower symbol row Z1, the main symbol (shark) of “6”, the sub symbol (shellfish), and the main symbol (Dugong) of “7” are arranged in order from the left, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. And the arrangement of the third symbol is reversed.

  In this case, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, if the middle symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 becomes the main symbol (shark) of “6”, the main symbol (6) on the effective line L4 ( Shark), that is, since the normal symbols, which are the main symbols corresponding to the even symbols, are aligned, it usually becomes a big hit, and after the big hit ends, it shifts to a low probability state and becomes a short time state. On the other hand, if the middle symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (Dugon) of “7”, it is the main symbol (Dugon) of “7” on the effective line L5, that is, the main symbol corresponding to the odd symbol. Since the probability variation symbols are aligned, it becomes a probability variation jackpot and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot ends. That is, the state shown in FIG. 4 (b) may be a big hit on the two active lines L4 and L5, and depending on the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, both the normal jackpot and the probable big hit This is a possible state, that is, a “double reach” state in which two reach is established.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can establish double reach in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. By establishing this double reach, it is simply a single reach (a reach that indicates the possibility of a big hit only on one active line when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed). In comparison, the player can be expected to have a higher chance of winning the game. Further, it is possible to make the player have more complicated feelings such as whether it is a probable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or whether it is a probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, and it is out of place. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  The hold display area Db is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. It is. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B), The number of entrances is held up to 4 times for entering the first entrance 64, and up to 4 times for entering the second entrance 640. The total number of reserved balls at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and also in the hold display area Db.

  In the holding display area Db, one holding ball number symbol (the ● symbol in FIGS. 4 (a) and (b)) is displayed for each holding ball number, and depending on the number of the displayed holding ball number symbols, the holding ball is displayed. The number of balls is displayed. That is, if one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the hold display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and if eight reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates that there are 8 balls. Moreover, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the hold display area Db, it indicates that the number of held balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Similarly, in the case of entering the second entrance 640, the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may do it. In addition, the maximum number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the maximum number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 640 are not limited to the same number of times and are different. The number of times may be set. For example, the maximum number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 may be set to 4 times, and the maximum number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 640 may be set to 2 times.

  Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Db, the number of reserved balls is a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into one or more is the same as the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with eight hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the second symbol display device 83 displays the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol) for a predetermined time. The variable display is alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. If the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down to the left of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. ing. In addition, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down to the right of the game board can pass. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol hold lamp. 84 is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four times, and is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 through which a sphere can enter is arranged on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are calculated. Although configured in the same way, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is five. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, although details will be described later, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Even if there is a high probability state, it is the same. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entrance to the first entrance 64 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, a first jackpot stop pattern is set. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed below the second winning hole 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big win lottery performed due to the entrance to the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, the first big win will be stopped. The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 650a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable prize-winning device 65 and the second variable prize-winning device 650 have a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and a front side about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The special winning openings 65a and 650a are normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that can be opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED 37Aa and LED 37Ba corresponding to the jackpot are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are A predetermined opening is provided for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Run.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the RAM 203 has a special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special figure 2 as shown in FIG. Reserved ball counter 203e, universal reserved ball counter 203f, universal reserved ball counter 203g, universal reserved ball counter 203h, universal reserved ball storage area 203i, universal reserved ball execution area 203j, special figure type flag At least 203k.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c202c, and a disconnect variation pattern table 202d202d.

  Further, in the main control device 110, the main winning features of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery in the second symbol display device 83 are described. In order to execute processing, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters.

  7 and 8, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202, and various reserved balls stored in the RAM 203. The areas 203a, 203b, 203i and the various reserved ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 21). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the counter update timing for each counter. Update.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated once (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returned to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Although details will be described later, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The stored special figure 1 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 at that time is the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the special figure reservation ball storage area 203b. Stored in one of the first to fourth areas.

  The value of the random number that becomes the big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 6B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. A first per-random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure second reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when a ball is won (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (the jackpot random number value), the MPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: a game state for a low probability state (a state in which the probability change is not in progress) and a high probability state (a state in which the probability change is in progress) having a higher probability of being a jackpot than the low probability state. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. By differentiating the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (big hit random value) that is a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random value “7,307,582” is “low” in the “gaming state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “probability state”.

  On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448 , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 are associated with the “high probability state” of the “gaming state” It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, there is a duplicate value between the jackpot random number value associated with the “low probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high probability state”. Each jackpot random value is set so that it does not become. If there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. As in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, the value of the random number that is a big hit is predicted. Since it can be made difficult to be done, fraud can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball in the RAM 203 together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203b.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in () is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect or the type of stop symbol (hereinafter “stop type”) Will be the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is a random number that is a big hit, The fluctuation pattern and the stop type are those of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 6B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There are “15R normal jackpot”, which is a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and “4R probable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 4 rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, and the second pitch The correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning to the mouth 640 is a jackpot is separately defined.

  In the example of FIG. 8B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table for the “first entrance” is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation big hit. That is, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the first entrance 64, the jackpot type becomes a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R.

  On the other hand, as the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the second entrance 640 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit. In other words, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the type of the big win is a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1 / 4R (25/100) with a probability of 4R.

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stoppages: “rear out of front / rear”, where the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol, and “completely out” where no reach occurs. A production) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in any reserved area of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big random number, the stop type is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the stop type at the time of departure. The

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C <b> 3, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values to be selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining the variation pattern, and is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 in FIG. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas.

  The MPU 201 determines variation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by using the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern tables 202bc and 203d (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and a deviation variation pattern table 202d used at the time of loss as the fluctuation pattern tables. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for detachment, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment depending on whether the gaming state is a low probability state during normal except for the shortage, or during the shortage or certain change. A use (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is prepared.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is obtained from the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

  Further, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time, When the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first per-random number counter C1 is determined from the out-of-range (normal) variation pattern, and the gaming state is in a short time or a probable variation The stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. The variation patterns selected in the case of the jackpot include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Among these variation patterns, the variation pattern (variation time) depends on the value of the variation type counter CS1. ) Is selected.

  Here, the various types of the reach reach are the change patterns with a short change time of 30 seconds, and the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the short reach (the so-called bitter stop pattern is aligned). . The various types of super reach are fluctuation patterns of 60 seconds and longer than normal reach types, and the first symbol (or third symbol) after a relatively long reach (for example, reach that develops from long reach or normal reach). ). Special reach types are fluctuation patterns that have a longer variation time of 90 seconds than the super reach types, and the reach that takes the longest time (for example, the reach that develops after the super reach or the destination from the normal reach is the super reach) This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after different special reach.

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (c), in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c, the game state is normal and short in the same manner as the variation pattern table 202d for disconnection (see FIGS. 8 (d) and 8 (e)). Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is varied depending on the probability change.

  Specifically, the association between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the game state is normal is 0 to 50 for various types of normal reach, 51 to 179 for various types of super reach, and 180 for various types of special reach. ~ 198. On the other hand, the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the gaming state is short or probable is 0 to 149 for various types of normal reach and 150 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 8C, when the gaming state is normal, various types of super reach and special reach having a long variation time are easily selected as variation patterns. On the other hand, when the gaming state is short-running or probabilistic, various types of normal reach having a short variation time are easily selected as variation patterns.

  During normal times, since the probability of winning a big hit is low, various types of super reach and special reach that have a long variation time are selected as the variation pattern, so that the variation production by various types of super reach and special reach is performed. , It can greatly expand the player's expectation that will be a big hit. On the other hand, during a short time or during a certain change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and a start winning is likely to occur at the second entrance 640. Therefore, if you select many variation patterns with a long variation time during a short time or certain change, it may take time to start the next variation production, giving the player a wait state, and may cause discomfort to the player There is. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a short time or a certain change, it is configured so that various types of normal reach having a shorter variation time than in the normal state can be easily selected, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of giving a person discomfort can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 8C, when the game state is in a short time or in a probable variation, various special reach types are not selected. Although details will be described later, the special reach types are not selected in the case of losing. In other words, when a fluctuating effect is performed by special reach, it means 100% jackpot. Here, during the probability change, it is a gaming state that will surely be a big win for the player, so if the variable effect is performed by special reach during the probability change, the variable effect ends earlier than the joy that became a big hit As a result, there is a strong dissatisfaction with the desire to shift to a special gaming state (a jackpot state). In the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuating effect due to the special reach is not performed during the time reduction or the probability change, so that such dissatisfaction of the player can be avoided.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the game state is the same in the short-time and the probability change, and the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS 1 is the same. The association between the pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c may be defined so that various special reach types are selected as the variation pattern during a short time. During the time shortage, it is not necessarily guaranteed that it will be a big hit, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit by performing a variable effect by special reach.

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, front / rear disengagement reach, and front / rear disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the range, the first is obtained when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the hit random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area It is determined from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d1.

  Dedicated to complete detachment includes a short lapse where the change ends in a short time (7 seconds) and the reach is not established, and a long lapse that is longer than the short deviation (10 seconds) but the reach is not established, Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for short deviation and 99 to 198 for long deviation. In addition, for reach, there are various types of normal reach where the reach is established but the fluctuation time is as short as 30 seconds, and various types of super reach where the fluctuation time is 60 seconds longer than the normal reach, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 The normal reach ranges from 0 to 149 and the super reach ranges from 150 to 198.

  FIG. 8E is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8E, the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, similar to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. It is referred to when the reach is determined to be other than the full-removal reach and short-reach and long-reach, and the reach other than the front-rear and front-rear reach, and the common reach with various types of normal reach and various types of super-reach. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the same reserved area when the gaming state is in a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is extracted from the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

  Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to reach is 0 to 190 for various types of normal reach, and 191 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  The off-set (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in a short time or during the probability change, so that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and the start winning prize at the second entrance 640 is obtained. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there is a lot of extraordinary time when the time is short or probable, it will take time to start the next fluctuation display, giving the player a wait state, and making the player uncomfortable There is sex. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured so that a short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  Also, in the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 that are referred to in the case of an outage, various types of special reach that can be selected as a variation pattern in the case of a big hit are not selected. As a result, when a fluctuating effect is performed by special reach, it is a 100% jackpot. Even in the case of jackpot, the special reach is selected as the variation pattern only when the gaming state is normal, and the probability of selection is also low at 10/199. Therefore, the special reach can be made to feel to the player as a special variation effect, and a great pleasure can be given to the player when the variation effect by the special reach is performed.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is configured to be divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. However, even when the gaming state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls. In the case of (for example, 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the change display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for outliers shown in FIG. 8D and FIG. 8E, when short out and long out are simply out, and the out is selected, refer to other tables. Alternatively, it may be configured to select a short deviation and a long deviation with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second per-random number counter C4 is a counter used for the lottery of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and returned to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4.

  In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. Acquired and stored in one of the first to fourth reserved areas in the reserved general ball storage area 203 i provided in the RAM 203.

  In the second random number counter C4, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, if the gaming state is normal, it is determined to be a win, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a stop symbol (first symbol). 2), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random number values that can be won when the gaming state is short or probable is 250, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1-250”, it is determined that the game state is in a short time or a certain change, and the second symbol display device 83 stops. As a symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than the normal time.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also shorter than normal, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times (enlarged state) is increased. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  Now, in the RAM 203, a special figure 1 holding ball storage comprising four holding areas (special figure 1 holding first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored with respect to the ball entering the first ball inlet 63 is shown. An area 203a is provided. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored with respect to the entrance to the second entrance 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b also has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas), similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. .

  Each reserved area provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has a first random number counter acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. C1, first per-type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, first per-type counter counter storage area 203a2, and fluctuation pattern selection counter for storing the values of the variation type counter CS1 It has a storage area 203a3 and a variation type counter storage area 203a4. Although not shown in the drawing, any one of the reserved areas provided in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is similar to each reserved area of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Storage areas are provided for storing the values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, respectively.

  In the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At this time, when there is no reservation in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 reservation first to fourth areas are vacant areas, each counter in the special figure 1 first reservation area Stores the value. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold second area. Store.

  When there are two holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the counters are stored only in the special figure 1 holding first and second areas, the counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding third area. Stores the value of. When there are three holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 holding first to third areas, the counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding fourth area. Stores the value of. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the first entrance 64, the special figure 1 hold first area, the special figure 1 hold second It can be stored in the area, the special figure 1 reserved third area, and the special figure 1 reserved fourth area.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, the stop Each value of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. Which of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the number, it is determined by the same method as in the case of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the second entrance 640, the special figure 2 hold first area, the special figure 2 hold second It can be stored in the area, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and the special figure 2 reserved fourth area.

  In addition, when the start winning to the 1st entrance 64 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the 1st to 4th reserved areas in FIG. 1, the value of each counter at that time is detected. Is discarded without being suspended. Similarly, if the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 2 holding first to fourth areas, The value is discarded without being held. In other words, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured such that the value of each counter can be held up to four start winnings.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure holding ball execution area 203c. When there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b at the start timing of the variation effect, the first per random number counter stored in the special figure 2 hold first area of the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. The values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and stop type counter CS1 are respectively the first per random number counter storage area 203c1 provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the first hit type It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  If there is no reservation in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and there is a reservation in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a has a special figure 1 reservation first area. The stored values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are moved to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Then, the value of each counter stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203c1, the first per type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the above, a jackpot lottery, a variation pattern of variation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

  In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type. The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Thus, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b regardless of whether there is a hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a. Value is transferred to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, determination of the big win lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol Is done. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the start winning at the second entrance 640 is prioritized over the start winning at the first entrance 64, and a lottery effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, the value of each counter of the special figure 1 reservation 1st area of the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reservation ball 1st area of the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b, After moving to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 holding second area or the special figure 2 holding second area is changed to a free special figure 1 holding first area or special figure. 2 is shifted to the reserved first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved second area or the special figure 2 reserved second area. The value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area.

  As a result, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball is saved. One area of the storage area 203b is released. Further, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the holding by the first entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 holding ball is stored. One area 203a is opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) is shifted to an area having a smaller area number regardless of the presence or absence of data in each reserved area. Data may be shifted only for a reserved area in which (variable counter values) are stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is 2, and the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area. If only the data is stored, the data in the special figure 1 holding first area is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and then the data in the special figure 1 holding second area is transferred to the special figure 1 holding first area. The shift process may be terminated by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the special figure 1 reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts is reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  The RAM 203 is also a general map composed of four reserved areas (ordinary reserved first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for the passage of a sphere in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. A holding ball storage area 203i is provided. Each reserved area has a second per-random number counter storage area for storing the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer by passing the sphere in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, respectively. 203i1.

  The ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i stores a second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the passing timing of the ball in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. At this time, when there is no reservation in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i and all of the general-purpose reserved first to fourth areas are vacant areas, the second random number counter C2 is stored in the general-purpose first reserved area. The value of is stored. If there is only one hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first area, the second random number in the general-purpose reserved second area Stores the value of the counter C4. When there are two holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first to second areas, The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored. When there are three holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first to third areas, The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored.

  As a result, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passing timing of the sphere in the order in which the passing of the sphere is detected in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 is normally reserved. It can be stored in the 1 area, the general map hold second area, the general map hold third area, and the general map hold fourth area. When the passing of a sphere is detected in the first or second through gates 67 and 670 when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first-to-fourth reserved areas in the ordinary map. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 at that time is discarded without being held.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with an ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. At the start timing of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, it is stored in the general-purpose hold first area of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i. Each value of the second per-random number counter C4 is moved to the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j, a winning lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed.

  Note that when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 in the first reserved area of the reserved figure in the ordinary figure holding ball storage area 203i is moved to the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j, it is then stored in the second reserved area in the reserved figure. In addition, the value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant ordinary reservation first area. Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold third area is shifted to the free general-purpose hold second area, and the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold fourth area The value is shifted to the third area where the figure is reserved.

  As a result, when the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 reserved in the universal symbol holding ball storage area 203i, only one ordinary symbol is retained. One area of the ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i is released.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when data shift processing is performed between each reserved area (general reserved first to fourth areas) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, whether or not there is data in each reserved area. However, each data in the reserved area (secondary area to fourth area) is shifted to an area having a smaller area number, but the data (values of various counters) ) May be shifted only for the reserved area in which is stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the general-purpose reserved first area and the general-purpose reserved second area. If the data is stored, the data of the general map hold first area is shifted to the general map hold ball execution area 203j, and then the data of the general map hold second area is shifted to the general map hold first area. The shift process may be terminated. As a result, the data shift process is not performed in the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the customary reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the RAM 203 is continued. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are first entrances detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. 64 or on the second entrance 640 (start winning), the number of held balls (standby) of the variation effect (variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81) performed in the first symbol display device 37 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S1613 in FIG. 20). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that each counter value is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. When stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a special figure 1 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. .

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that each counter value is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. When stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a special figure 2 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 2 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a winning prize is detected and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. .

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command to hold the ball with a variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 held in the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the number and the value of the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 itself. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect without accessing the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9C, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2). (See the reserved ball number counter 223b). In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect managed in the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  It should be noted that the number of reserved balls in the changing effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 managed in the voice lamp control device 113 (see Fig. 1 reserved ball number counter 223a), and the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls (figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) associated with the start winning of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is based on the variation pattern command. And updated at the timing of setting the variation effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the timing of starting the variation effect). That is, if the starting variation effect is accompanied by a start winning at the first entrance 64, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the starting winning at the first entrance 64 is reduced by one and starting variation. If the effect is associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 is reduced by one.

  The main controller 110 determines whether the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command in the variation pattern command transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64, Information indicating whether the start entry to the second entrance 640 is included is included. In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information included in the variation pattern command, whether the variation effect to be started is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64, or the start to the second entrance 640 Based on the result of the determination, the number of reserved balls in the changing production accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 and the change accompanying the starting winning to the second entrance 640 are determined. A process of reducing one of the number of reserved balls for production by 1 is performed.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113, with respect to the display control device 114, every time the number of reserved balls managed therein changes, Then, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the number of reserved balls, which is added to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640, is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command in the reserved display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the hold display area Db, the number of variable displays (the number of hold balls) held by the start winning to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is shown to the player.

  The usual figure holding ball number counter 203f passes the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the above. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S1613 in FIG. 20). Then, every time when the start winning is detected and the number of spheres held for variation display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (S1503 to S1504, S1508 to S1509 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the change display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is executed.

  The usual figure holding ball number counter 203f is configured to hold the change display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) up to four times. Further, the second symbol hold lamps 84 (see FIG. 2) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f are turned on. Thereby, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the second symbol is notified to the player.

  The special symbol type flag 203k indicates whether the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol), which is a special symbol, is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance. It is a flag indicating whether it is executed in accordance with the start winning to 640. When the special figure type flag 203k is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the special symbol type When the flag 203k is on, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640.

  The special figure type flag 203k is set to off or on at the initial stage of setting the start of the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, when the execution timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0, and the start to the second entrance 640 is started. If the values of the various counters acquired with winning are held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (see S1304 to S1307 in FIG. 16).

  In addition, when the execution timing of the change effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0, whereas the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is If the value of various counters that are greater than 0 and acquired with the start winning at the first entrance 64 are held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, The values of various counters stored in the special figure 1 holding first area are shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (see S1304, S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 16). ).

  In the MPU 201, as a big hit type table (see FIG. 8B) used for determining the big hit type when it is determined that the big hit is determined by the big win lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Based on the figure type flag 203k, either “first entrance” or “second entrance” is set. Specifically, when the special figure type flag 203k is off, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big win is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64. Therefore, a jackpot type table for “first entrance” is set. On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is on, the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640. , The jackpot type table for “second entrance” is set.

  As described above, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with the winning at the first entrance 64 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R. In addition, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with winning the second entrance 640 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). The probability is 15R normal jackpot, and the probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) is 4R probability variable jackpot. In other words, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case.

  As described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 changes according to the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, and flags illustrated in FIG. 6A, a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and various flags. And a work area (work area) in which values such as counters and I / O are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 21), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and lower sides of the opening / closing plates of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with respect to the axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and commands via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  Here, the details of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least an audio data storage area 222a.

  The audio data storage area 222a is an area for storing audio data that is data for reproducing audio output from the audio output device 226. The voice data storage area 222a is a voice that is output when a predetermined character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a light-emitting effect image in which a predetermined region is brightly emitted on the third symbol display device 81. Voice data corresponding to each type of voice is stored, such as a voice to be output in the case of a reach during the fluctuating effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “reach voice”). Yes.

  When the MPU 221 receives a display command indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 reads audio data corresponding to the display content indicated by the display command from the audio data storage area 222a of the ROM 222222, The audio output based on the audio data is output from the audio output device 226. As a result, the voice output device 226 can cause the third symbol display device 81 to output voice data suitable for the display content.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 according to the command received from the main control device 110 and the operation state of the frame button 22 by the player, and the determined display mode. Is instructed to the display control device 114 by a command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to select sound data in accordance with the determined display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and to output sound reproduced by the sound data from the sound output device 226. Is also possible. However, in the pachinko machine 10, the display command indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is received from the display control device 81, and the voice is synchronized with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command. Data is selected, and sound reproduced by the sound data is output from the sound output device 226.

  As a result, even if an image different from the display mode determined by the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for some reason such as noise, the display command received from the display control device 114 causes the Since the display content of the 3 symbol display device 81 can be grasped, the voice output device 226 can output the sound that matches the display content actually displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81. Further, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a sequential display command, so that the display timing of the image on the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output device 113 Can be easily matched with the output timing of the sound, and the occurrence of sound deviation can be suppressed.

  The pachinko machine 10 prepares different voice data for each of the main symbols of the third symbol (10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”) as the reach voice. Specifically, when a normal reach (a reach that is a 15R normal jackpot when the symbols are aligned) occurs with the main symbol of “0” as a reach symbol (for example, a character symbol corresponding to the main symbol of “0” (for example, The 0th symbol normal reach sound data 222a0, which is sound data for reproducing the sound “Leach!” In the voice of “Kasago”), is stored in the sound data storage area 222a. When the probability symbolic reach is reached with the main symbol of “1” as the reach symbol (the reach that reaches the 4R probability variation jackpot or 15R probability variation jackpot when the symbols are aligned), the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol of “1” (for example, The first symbol probability variation reachable sound data 222a1, which is sound data for reproducing the sound “reach!” With the voice of “octopus”), is stored in the sound data storage area 222a.

  For each of the main symbols “2” to “9”, when a normal reach or a probability change reach occurs with the main symbol as the reach symbol, the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol is “Leach!” , “REACH!”, “REACH!” Audio data for reproducing the audio is stored in the audio data storage area 222a as the second symbol normal reach audio data 222a2 to the ninth symbol probability change reach audio data 222a9, respectively. Has been.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the reach occurs, the reach voice is changed for each main symbol that becomes the reach symbol. Moreover, the reach voice is output as a voice of a character design corresponding to the main design. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character arranged in the main symbol that has become the reach symbol is notifying the reach. Therefore, the player's interest in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main symbol corresponding to the even number is a reach symbol, a 15R normal jackpot is generated when the symbols are aligned as described above. Further, when the main symbol corresponding to the odd number is a reach symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 15R probability variation jackpot occurs when the symbols are arranged.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the reach sound output when the reach occurs in the main symbol corresponding to the odd number is “probability reach sound”, and the reach sound output when the reach occurs in the main symbol corresponding to the even number. Are classified as “normal reach speech”.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9B, the difference between the probability-change reach speech and the normal reach speech will be described. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing probability variation reach speech and normal reach speech.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the probability-variable reach voice starts playing the voiced section as soon as the play is started, and a voice such as “reach!” Is uttered. Then, after a predetermined time (1500 milliseconds in the example of FIG. 9B), the voiced segment ends and the reproduction of the probability variation reach voice ends. On the other hand, when the normal reach voice is started to play, a silence period is played for a certain period of time, 20 milliseconds in the present embodiment, and then a predetermined time length (1500 milliseconds in the example of FIG. 9B). ) Is played. That is, when the normal reach sound starts to be played, the sound is silenced for the first 20 milliseconds, and then a sound such as “reach!” Is uttered.

  In addition, the time length of the sound section is not limited to 1500 milliseconds, and may be an arbitrary time length. Also, the time lengths of the probability-variable reach speech and the normal reach speech may be different, and the length of the sounded section is an arbitrary time length for each of the reach speech data 222a0 to 222a9 corresponding to each main symbol. May be set.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 4 (b), the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 at the stage where the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. A double reach is established that can be a big hit or a promising big hit. In other words, normal reach and probability variation reach occur simultaneously.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the 3rd symbol display device, the display command from the display control device to the sound lamp control device notifies the establishment of the probability change reach as the display content of the 3rd symbol display device. And a display command for notifying that “normal reach has been established” is transmitted, and the voice lamp control device superimposes the probability variation reach sound and the normal reach sound and outputs them from the sound output device. However, as described above, when the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it was difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make each reach sound easy to hear by outputting the words that are produced by each sound in the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound. The timing of the words to be uttered must be synchronized, and each reach voice becomes uniform with only different voices and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach sound in a strictly synchronized manner, and to output the words that are uttered by each sound completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probability variation symbol) that establish double reach, There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  Furthermore, when a double reach is established, the player has the expectation that the probability variation jackpot will be established as a jackpot rather than the normal jackpot because the jackpot probability is higher after the jackpot. . Therefore, in consideration of the expectations of the player, when the double reach is spoken, the character corresponding to the main symbol that has established the probability variation reach rather than the voice of the character corresponding to the main symbol that has established the normal reach. There is also a demand for the player to listen to the reach voice by voice, that is, the player wants to hear the probability change reach voice to the player.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first sets the reach that establishes the probability variation reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of symbol, and then a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach. Keep it. On the other hand, when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 receives each display command from the display control device 113, the sound data corresponding to the display content indicated by the display command is immediately read from the sound data storage area 222a. The sound is reproduced and output from the sound output device 226. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 first outputs a probability change reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that establishes the probability change reach, and then Immediately, the normal reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the normal reach is output.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 9B, the probability-variable reach sound starts to be played in the voiced section immediately after the start of playback, and a sound such as “reach!” Is uttered. On the other hand, since the normal reach sound is a silent section for about 20 milliseconds even when the reproduction is started, the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced with no sound.

  When the MPU 221 starts the reproduction of the reach sound, the MPU 221 immediately confirms the number of reach sounds being reproduced. Then, when there are two reach sounds currently being played back, the playback of the most recently played reach sound, that is, the normal reach sound that has been started later is stopped. Thus, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound is reproduced to the end. In addition, since the normal reach sound has a silent period for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, the normal reach sound is stopped during the silent period. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  When the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display command for notifying that “normal reach has been established” together with the reach symbol is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp is displayed. Based on the display command, the control device 113 outputs a normal reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the normal reach. In this case as well, the first 20 milliseconds is a silent period, but even if a voice such as “Leach!” Is output with a delay of 20 milliseconds, the person does not feel that it has been output with a delay. Further, if an image that moves in complete synchronization with the sound is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if a sound such as “Leach!” Is output with a delay of about 20 milliseconds, the sound and the display are shifted. The player does not feel that this has occurred. Therefore, even if a silence interval of 20 milliseconds is initially set in normal reach speech, there is no problem.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the time length of the silence period of the normal reach voice is set to 20 milliseconds, but the time length does not feel that the voice such as “reach!” Is output with delay, As long as there is no time range in which the sound shift is not felt between the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226, it may be arbitrarily set.

  In the audio data storage area 222a, other audio data 222a10 is stored as audio data other than the reach audio data. As described above, the other audio data 222a10 includes audio data for reproducing audio output when a predetermined character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a light emitting effect on the third symbol display device 81. Audio data for reproducing audio output when an image is displayed is included.

  Next, details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a reach sound reproducing counter 223c, a reproduced sound data storage area 223d, a probability change time short flag 223e, a first through gate passing flag 223f, a second It includes at least a through gate passage flag 223g, a first through gate passage time counter 223h, a second through gate passage time counter 223i, a first through gate passage ball counter 223j, and a second through gate passage ball counter 223k. Yes.

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the first symbol display device 37 (and third The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effects held in the main control device 110, which are the variable effects performed in the symbol display device 81).

  The special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, and the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol) in accordance with the start winning to the second entrance 640. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effects held in the main control device 110, which are the variable effects performed in the symbol display device 81).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls that have won the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 110, respectively. The number of held balls is managed by the ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect by the start winning to the first entrance 64, and adds the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the addition of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is received. The later value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 held in the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a (S2007 in FIG. 24). reference).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e in the main control device 110 by adding the number of reserved balls of the variation effect by the start winning to the second entrance 640. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 is included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2010 of FIG. 24).

  On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted in the main control device 110. When the variation effect mode in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set along with the reception, the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or to the second entrance 640. One value is subtracted from either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b depending on whether the start winning prize is involved (see S2108 and S2109 in FIG. 25). Whether or not the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start winning at the second entrance 640 is indicated in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Is included, and a determination is made based on the information.

  In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110, the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the reserved ball number indicated by the command into the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure. 2 Stored or updated at the timing of storing in the reserved ball number counter 223b or updating the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. In order to notify the display controller 114 of the sum of the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. The data is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2008 in FIG. 24 and S2110 in FIG. 25).

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it displays a hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the hold display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The reach sound reproduction counter 223c is a counter for counting the reach sound being reproduced (output from the sound output device 226). This reach sound reproduction counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. When a reach display command for notifying reach establishment (establishment of probability change reach or normal reach establishment) is received from the display control device 114, the reach corresponding to the reach design (main design) included in the reach display command is received by the MPU 221. Audio is read from the audio data storage area 222a and reproduced, and 1 is added to the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c (see S2304 in FIG. 29).

  If the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is “2”, it means that two reach sounds are being reproduced. The two reach sounds are being reproduced when the double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 first sets the reach symbol as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent in conjunction with the type of reach, and then a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent in conjunction with the type of reach design that has established reach normally. Yes. These two reach display commands are transmitted in succession. Between the two reach display commands, other display commands (commands indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, other than the reach display commands). Command) is not sent.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 221 receives each command from the display control device 113, the MPU 221 immediately reads out the audio data corresponding to the display content indicated by the command from the audio data storage area 222a, and reproduces the audio. Output from the audio output device 226.

  That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 first outputs a probability change reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that establishes the probability change reach, and then Immediately, the normal reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the normal reach is output. Therefore, in this case, first, the reach sound reproduction counter 223c becomes “1” when the probability-variable reach sound is output, and then the reach sound reproduction counter 223c becomes “2” when the normal reach sound is output. Become.

  Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the 3rd symbol display device, the voice lamp control device notifies “establishment of probability change reach” as the display content of the 3rd symbol display device. And a command for notifying that “normal reach has been established” is received from the display control device, the probability-reach speech and normal reach speech are superimposed and output from the audio output device. However, as described above, when the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it was difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make each reach sound easy to hear by outputting the words that are produced by each sound in the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound. The timing of the words to be uttered must be synchronized, and each reach voice becomes uniform with only different voices and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach sound in a strictly synchronized manner, and to output the words that are uttered by each sound completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probability variation symbol) that establish double reach, There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, first, the reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command is output. On the other hand, when the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is “2” and the number of reach sounds being reproduced is two, the reach sound that has been reproduced most recently, that is, the normal reach sound that has been reproduced later is displayed. Stop playback.

  As a result, when double reach is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, two of the probability variation reach sound and the normal reach sound are once played, but the normal reach sound is immediately stopped. Only the probability change reach sound is played to the end. Here, as described with reference to FIG. 9B, the normal reach voice has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds. Therefore, even if the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, the normal reach sound is stopped during the silent section. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established probability variation reach, and thereafter Immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach, and in the audio lamp control device 113, first, according to the received reach display command, The playback of two reach sounds is started in order. If the sound lamp control device 113 determines that two reach sounds are being reproduced, the sound lamp control device 113 stops the reproduction of the reach sound that has been most recently started (reach sound that has been started later). As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. In other words, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  Reach voice playback counter 223c stops the playback of the most recently played reach voice (normal reach voice started to be played later) when the value of the reach voice playback counter 223c is "2". At the same time, it is initialized to “0”. The reach voice reproduction counter 223c is also initialized to “0” when a display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113.

  The reproduction audio data storage area 223d is an area for storing audio data for reproducing audio output from the audio output device 226. The MPU 221 generates an audio signal while decoding the audio data stored in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d, and outputs the generated audio signal to the audio output device 226, so that the audio is output from the audio output device 226. Played.

  Here, the audio lamp control device 113 has four audio reproduction channels, and is configured to be able to reproduce four audio data simultaneously. In the reproduction audio data storage area 223d, an area for storing audio data to be reproduced by the audio reproduction channel is prepared for each of the four audio reproduction channels. That is, a first channel area 223d1 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the first audio reproduction channel, a second channel area 223d2 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the second audio reproduction channel, A third channel area 223d3 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the third audio reproduction channel and a fourth channel area 223d4 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the fourth audio reproduction channel are reproduced. It is provided in the audio data storage area 223d.

  Based on the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command received from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 reads audio data corresponding to the display content from the audio data storage area 222a of the ROM 222. The read audio data is stored in any one of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d.

  The MPU 221 decodes the audio data stored in the corresponding first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 for each of the first to fourth audio reproduction channels, and generates an audio signal. The audio signal generated for each audio reproduction channel is mixed and output to the audio output device 226. As a result, the four audio data can be reproduced simultaneously and output from the audio output device 226.

  The probability change time short flag 223e is a flag indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change or time reduction. When the probability change time short flag 223e is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probability change or time shortage, and when it is off, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, neither in probability change nor time reduction. It shows that.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a confirmation command (a command for confirming and displaying a stop symbol on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect) from the main control device 110, the probability variation time short flag 223e is the third flag. Updating is performed based on the result of the final display on the symbol display device 81 (see S2021 in FIG. 24).

  Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot) is determined and displayed, the subsequent gaming state is in the middle of probability variation, so the probability variation time-short flag 223e is set to ON. In addition, when the symbol of the normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot) is confirmed and displayed, the game state becomes short in time until the fluctuating effect is performed 100 times thereafter, so the probability change short flag 223e is set to ON. To do. In addition, when the game state is short-running, it is determined whether or not the variable effect has been performed 100 times after the winning of the normal symbol every time the display of the outlying symbol is confirmed, and the variable effect is performed 100 times. When the determination is made, the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state, so the probability change time-short flag 223e is set to OFF.

  The probable change time short flag 223e is used to perform control to instruct the player to perform so-called “right-handed” or “left-handed” via the third symbol display device 81 according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a high probability state even in a low probability state. However, it is the same, but the probability of 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second entrance 640 is the ball to the first entrance 64 It is set higher than when entering. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, when the gaming state is normal, there are many cases where the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so there is no electric accessory. A ball is launched toward the first entrance 64 so that the sphere passes through the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a big hit lottery is performed by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to obtain many opportunities and aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  However, there are some players who do not know that, as the specifications of the pachinko machine 10, the method of launching the ball must be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed” according to the gaming state. Therefore, the present pachinko machine 10 displays on the third symbol display device 81 hitting direction instruction screens 811 and 812 for instructing the player to “left strike” or “right strike”.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the batting direction instruction screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to “left strike”, and FIG. 10B is “right strike” to the player. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the hitting direction instruction | indication screen which instruct | indicates.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to “left strike” is “← strike left” on the lower left side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81! This is a screen on which a symbol 811 is displayed. Since the symbol 811 includes a left-pointing arrow, and the symbol 811 is arranged on the left side of the front of the third symbol display device 81, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left-handed” is displayed. Thus, it is possible to tell the player in an easy-to-understand manner so that the ball is launched so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device 80 provided with the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to “right hit” is “hit right!” On the lower right side in front view of the third symbol display device 81. Is a screen on which a symbol 812 is displayed. The symbol 812 includes a right-pointing arrow, and since the symbol 812 is arranged on the right side of the front of the third symbol display device 81, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed” is displayed. Thus, it is possible to tell the player in an easy-to-understand manner so that the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 provided with the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the player is likely to be left-handed when the gaming state is in the probability changing state or in the time saving state from the probability changing time-short flag 223e. If there is a possibility that the player is left-handed, the right-handed hand is likely to be a big hit of 15R probability during the time of probability change or during the short time, which is advantageous for the player. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed” (S2216 in FIG. 27). Upon receiving this right-handed instruction screen display command, the display control device 114 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed” shown in FIG. 10B on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to direct the player to “right hit” the ball, and the player can entertain the game in an advantageous state.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a possibility that the player is right-handed when the gaming state is normal, from the probability variation time-short flag 223e. And if there is a possibility that the player is making a right-hand hit, it will be easier to get a start prize through the first entrance 64 and a lot of opportunities to win a big hit. Since this is more advantageous to the player, a left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left-handed” on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26 S2208). Upon receiving this left-handed instruction screen display command, the display control device 114 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left-handed” shown in FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to direct the player to “left strike” the ball, and the player can entertain the game in an advantageous state.

  Returning to FIG. 9C, the description will be continued. The first through gate passage flag 223f is a flag indicating that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67. The second through gate passage flag 223g is a flag indicating that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670. The first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g indicate that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 when both are on, and when the second through gate passage flag 223g is off, It indicates that the sphere does not pass through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670.

  The first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are both set to OFF as initial values in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first through gate passage command that is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 and notifies that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67, The MPU 221 sets the first through gate passage flag 223f to ON. Further, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a second through-gate passage command that is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 and notifies that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670, The MPU 221 sets the second through gate passage flag 223g to on.

  Here, the first through gate passage command is a command that the main control device 110 transmits to the audio amplifier control device 113 when the main control device 110 detects the passage of the sphere of the first through gate 67. . The second through gate passage command is a command that the main control device 110 transmits to the audio amplifier control device 113 when the main control device 110 detects the passage of the sphere of the second through gate 670.

  Although details will be described later with reference to the free chart of FIG. 26, the MPU 221 performs a right-handed / left-handed determination process. In this right-handed left-handed determination process, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, the second through-gate 670 is turned on for 10 seconds by looking at the on / off state of the second through-gate passing flag 223g. When it is detected that three balls have passed, it is determined that the player is “right-handed” even though the player is in the normal state, and the ball that instructs “left-handed” which is advantageous to the player during the normal state A left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the direction instruction screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic change or in a short time, when the first through gate passage flag 223f is turned on / off, three balls are placed on the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. When it is detected that the player has passed, it is determined that the player is “left-handed” even if the player is in the process of changing or shortening the time. A right-handing instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the hitting direction instruction screen to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, when it is advantageous for the player to hit the right, only one ball passes through the through gate on the left side of the game board, and the player makes a left strike. Some of them have made notifications instructing “right-handed”. However, even if the player is right-handed, it is possible that some balls will flow down the left side of the game board, and that ball is on the left side of the game board. Passing through the through gate can also occur sufficiently. Each time, “right-handed” is instructed, the player is troublesome. In addition, even if the player is left-handed, every time a ball passes through the through gate, if a notification is given that instructs “right-handed”, the notification will occur frequently. After all, it makes the player feel annoying.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is detected that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 within 10 seconds. The left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third-ball display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left-handed” which is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing probability or in a short time, by detecting that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, the game is in the process of changing in probability or in the time limit. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display on the third symbol display device 81 a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed” which is advantageous to the user. As a result, even though the player is firing the ball in an advantageous direction, a screen instructing the direction of the hitting ball is displayed each time a part of the balls are launched in a direction different from the advantageous direction. It can be suppressed. Moreover, even if the player is firing a ball in a direction different from the advantageous direction, it is possible to suppress the frequent display of the screen for instructing the hitting direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being hampered by the screen for instructing the hitting direction.

  The first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are each set to OFF at the stage where the right-handed / left-handed determination process executed by the MPU 221 is completed.

  The time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is a counter for counting an elapsed time after the ball passes through the first through gate 67. The second through-gate passing time counter 223i is a counter for counting an elapsed time after the sphere passes through the second through-gate 670. The first through gate passing ball number counter 223j is a counter that counts the number of balls that have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. The second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is a counter that counts the number of balls that have passed through the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds.

  The first through gate passed time counter 223h, the second through gate elapsed time counter 223i, the first through gate passed ball number counter 223j, and the second through gate passed ball number counter 223k are all RAMs 223 that are executed when the power is turned on. In the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22), 0 is set as the initial value. When the value of the time counter after passing through the first through gate 223h and the time counter after passing through the second through gate 223i are 0, the value of 0 is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is 0, the first through gate passing flag 223f is turned on and the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 while the gaming state is in the process of being changed or reduced in time. When this is detected, 1 is set in the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, and 1 is set in the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j. Further, when the value of the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is 0, it is detected that the second through gate passing flag 223g is turned on and the ball has passed through the second through gate 670 while the gaming state is normal. Then, 1 is set in the second through-gate passing time counter 223i, and 1 is set in the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k.

  After that, the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j detects that the first through-gate passing flag 223f is turned on and the ball has passed through the first through-gate 67 while the gaming state is in the midst of probability change or time saving. And 1 is added. The second through gate passing ball number counter 223j is incremented by 1 when it is detected that the second through gate passing flag 223g is turned on while the gaming state is normal and the ball has passed through the second through gate 670. The

  When the value of the time counter after passing through the first through gate 223h and the time counter after passing through the second through gate 223i is a number other than 0, the counter update processing (FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond. In S1912), an update process of adding 1 is performed. Then, the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate are set to 0 again when the value reaches 10000, and thereafter, the values are maintained at 0. Further, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j is set to 0 in accordance with the time counter 22h after passing through the first through gate being set to 0. Similarly, the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k is set to 0 as the second through-gate passing time counter 22i is set to 0.

  As a result, the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is set to 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds) when a ball enters the first through gate 67 with the value being 0 while the gaming state is being changed or shortened. The number of spheres that have passed through the first through gate 67 during the 10 seconds is counted by the first through gate passing sphere counter 223j. Further, the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate counts 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds) when a ball enters the second through gate 670 while the game state is normal and the value is 0. During the 10 seconds, the number of spheres passing through the second through gate 670 is counted by the second through gate passing sphere counter 223k.

  If the value of the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j is “2” while the game state is changing or shortening, the first through-gate passing flag 223f is turned on, and the first through-gate 67 is When it is detected that the ball has passed, it means that three balls pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the player is “left-handed” even though the player is in the process of changing the probability or the time is short, and a ball that instructs “right-handed” that is advantageous to the player during the time of the probability change or in the time is short. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the direction instruction screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed”, so that the player can make “right-handed” which is advantageous to the player during the probability change or in a short time. Can be directed to.

  As the right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted, “0” is set in the first through-gate passing time counter 223h, and “0” is set in the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j.

  Also, when the game state is normal and the value of the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is “2”, the second through gate passing flag 223k is turned on, and the ball has passed through the second through gate 670. Is detected, it means that three balls pass through the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the player is “right-handed” despite being in the normal state, and the third direction of the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left-handed” which is advantageous to the player during the normal time is displayed. A left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left strike”, so that the player is directed to “left strike” which is advantageous to the player during normal times. Can do.

  As the left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted, “0” is set in the second through-gate passing time counter 223i, and “0” is set in the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k.

  The RAM 223 also stores a main control command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a display received by the display control device 114. A display control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command until processing corresponding to the command is performed, a change start flag (not shown) indicating that a change effect should be started in an ON state, etc. have.

  Each of the main control command storage area and the display control command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the main command determination process (see FIG. 24) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the main control command storage area is read out, and the main command is read out. The command is analyzed by the determination process, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  When the sound reproduction setting process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the display command stored first among the unprocessed display commands stored in the display control command storage area is read. The voice data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command is read out from the voice data storage area 222a provided in the ROM 222 by the voice playback setting process, and the read voice data is played back as the playback voice. Processing for storing in an empty channel area (any of the first to fourth channel areas) in the data storage area 223d is performed. As a result, it is possible to output from the sound output device 81 a sound that matches the display content of the third symbol display device 81.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 24). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S2102 in FIG. 25).

  Returning to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 237, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 sends a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. 113, and a display command for notifying the display content to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  An MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 are also connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which a display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in an effect corresponding to the display data table is stored. The MPU 231 specifies the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, reads the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads the read data table. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113. Display data tables corresponding to the confirmed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

  The demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and received by receiving a confirmed command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. It is an effect that is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol is an outlier symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either 15R probability big jackpot, 15R normal jackpot or 4R probability big jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  The restart effect is when the fixed command transmitted from the main controller 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image obtained by vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored. A display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared for each table according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol set. In addition, the display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect includes the one that displays the out symbol as a stop symbol, the one that displays the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot), and the normal jackpot (15R normal) Each of them is provided with a decisive display.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type is one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of “sea stage”, “palace stage”, and “deep sea stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Or information specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target when the back surface type specifies that any of the back surfaces A to C is displayed. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the back image rendering content in the display data table will be described. You may make it prescribe | regulate the display status information which shows whether a back image should be displayed. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, color, etc. changed with the passage of time. This display state information may be information indicating an elapsed time after the rear image in the initial state is displayed, for example. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table depending on the rear surface type). It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is started, and the type information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 for the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), A unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In this embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is attached to each of the third symbols. For example, “0” is assigned to the main symbol “0”, “1” is assigned to the sub symbol between “0” and “1”, and “1” is assigned to the main symbol “1”. “2” is assigned to the symbol as an identification number, and “3” is assigned to the sub-graphic between “1” and “2” as an identification number. In this way, the sub-design is also given a different identification number depending on the position (which main symbol is between) where the sub-design is inserted.

  In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from when the variation starts until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the symbol identification number is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, the third symbol is displayed at a high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined at some addresses. For example, when displaying high-speed fluctuation, the display content is defined as “high-speed fluctuation display”. When displaying a mermaid character image, the display content is defined as “mermaid character display”, and a light-emitting effect image is displayed. When it is to be displayed, the display content is defined as “light emission effect display”.

  When the establishment of the probability variation reach is displayed, the display content defines “establishment of the probability variation reach” together with the type of the main symbol for which the probability variation reach is established. When displaying the establishment of the normal reach, “normal reach establishment” is defined as the display content together with the type of the main symbol that established the normal reach. In addition, when displaying double reach, both probability variation reach and normal reach are established, so the display content first defines “establishment of probability variation reach” together with the type of main symbol that established probability variation reach. In addition, “normal reach establishment” is defined together with the type of main symbol for which normal reach is established.

  The display content defined in the display data table is used to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 15) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in a display data table buffer 233a described later provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233b is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, 1 is added to the pointer 233b. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233b, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 performs control to output sound from the sound output device 226 according to the display content notified by this display command.

  When a plurality of display contents are defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display contents is generated in order from the display contents previously defined, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device. It transmits to 113. As described above, when the double reach is established in the 3rd symbol display device 81, first, the probability variation reach is established as the display content at the address at which the establishment of the double reach is displayed in the display data table. “Probability reach establishment” is defined together with the main symbol type, and then “normal reach establishment” is defined together with the main symbol type that established the normal reach. Therefore, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach, and then immediately performs normal reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design established.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, a pointer 233b, a drawing list area 233c, and a time counter 233d.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233b one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. A drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  When the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 performs control to output sound from the sound output device 226 according to the display content notified by this display command.

  The pointer 233b is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233b to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 32A )), The value of the pointer 233b is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233b is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 13). Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233c is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 13, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value Processed, combined with other sprites according to the α blending information, color tone corrected according to the color information, and filtered according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol display display). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. The That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a where the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The time counter 233d is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 32B). ))), The time counter 233d is decremented by one each time the display setting process (S2603) is executed. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored, the above-described image data is stored as compressed data. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. And the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, whereby a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written into one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

  The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is then read, while the other The next one frame of image data is written into the frame buffer area.

  In this manner, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 21. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the counter buffer 202 b of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 899, 99, 99, 250) are reached, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104). A start winning process associated with winning a prize at the ball outlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640 is executed (S1105). Further, a through-gate passage process accompanying the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is executed (S1106). Details of the variation process, the start winning process, and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16, 15, and 18, respectively.

  After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S1107), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1108), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). The start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When there is a winning, a holding process of values indicated by various random number counters and a counting process of the number of held balls are executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S1201). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is shown). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA) is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1202). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S1201: No), or even if there is a win at the first entrance 64, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 is provided. If the number of reserved balls NA <4 is not satisfied (S1202: No), the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), and if the number of reserved balls NA <4 of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 (S1202: Yes). 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of held balls NA) (S1203), and further, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1204).

  Next, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NA of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 updated by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205). Transition to processing. The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1601 of the main process (FIG. 20). In the voice lamp control device 113, the ball holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the number of held balls NA of the fluctuating effect accompanying winning in the first entrance 64 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command. Manage numbers.

  In the subsequent process of S11206, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640 (S1206). Here, a ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) It is determined whether or not the number of retained balls NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1207). Then, there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S1206: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 If the number of held balls NB <4 is not satisfied (S1207: No), the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), and the number of reserved balls NB <4 of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S1207: Yes). The value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203 (the number of held balls NB) is incremented by 1 (S1208), and further, a first per random number counter C1, a first per type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S1209).

  Next, the special figure 2 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NB of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 updated by the processing of S1208 is set (S1210). End the process and return to the timer interrupt process. The special figure 2 reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1601 of the main process (FIG. 20). In the voice lamp control device 113, the ball holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the number of held balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the winning in the second entrance 640 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. Manage numbers.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 1X4), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S1302), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changed. If not (S1302: No), it is then determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is stopped (S1303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1303: Yes), it means that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) can be started. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640) is greater than 0 (S1304). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) is larger than 0 (S1304: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) ) Is subtracted by 1 (S1305), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1306).

  In this data shift process, the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Hold 2nd area → Special figure 2 hold 1st area, Special figure 2 hold 3rd area → Special figure 2 hold 2nd area, Special figure 2 hold 4th area → Special figure 2 hold 3rd area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the second entrance 640. After indicating that it is to be executed, the fluctuation start process (S1308) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this process is terminated. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing of S1304, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of held balls NB) is not larger than 0, that is, the number of held balls NB is 0, and the start winning to the second entrance 640 is made. If it is determined that there is no fluctuating variation effect associated with (S1304: No), then the value of the special figure 1 retention ball number counter 203d (the retention ball of the variation effect associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64) It is determined whether or not (number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309).

  As a result, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the held ball number NA is 0, and the hold associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held. If it is determined that there is no changed production effect (S1309: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA). 1 is subtracted (S1310), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S1311).

  This data shift process shifts data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 holding first area of the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Reservation 2nd area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 1st Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 2nd Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 4th Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (S1312), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64. After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1308, the fluctuation start process in the first symbol display device 37A is executed, and this process ends.

  In this variation process, when it becomes possible to start the variation effect (S1303: Yes), first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1304). ), When the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, when the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 is held (S1304: Yes), the special figure Regardless of the value of the 1-holding ball number counter 203d, that is, whether or not the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held, it is held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the data (each counter value), the variation effect is started. As a result, the winning prize at the second entrance 640 is configured so that the big win lottery is performed in preference to the starting prize at the first entrance 64, and the variation effect is performed based on the big win lottery. Yes.

  In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has passed (S1313). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If it has not passed (S1313: No), the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is updated (S1314), and this process is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the currently lit LED is red from the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B until the variation time elapses after the variation starts. If there is, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is turned on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and turn on the blue LED. Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S1313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S1315). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a change start process (S1308) described later with reference to FIG.

  That is, whether or not a big hit is determined by the process of S1308 according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, the symbol will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds) or the 4R probability variation jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of four rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a transition jackpot or a symbol that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability change big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 4R probability change big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue color are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1315, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as the LED of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A confirmation command is set in order to confirm in synchronization with the lighting (S1316), and this process is terminated. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the change start process (S1308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1308). This variation start process (S1308) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. A lottery of “big hit” or “off” (big hit lottery) is performed, and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changing effect performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a big hit lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c (S1401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (that is, normal and short time), “7,307,582” associated with the “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a. "Is a jackpot random number value, and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (ie, probabilistic change)," 28, 58, 85 "associated with the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a. 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836 , 866, 892 "is the jackpot random value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value. Determine.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1401 that it is a big hit (S1401: Yes), in order to set the display mode at the time of the big win, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag is on (S1402). . If the special figure type flag is on (S1402: Yes), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the second entrance 640 Therefore, as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table for “second entrance” (see FIG. 8B) is set (S1403).

  On the other hand, when the special figure type flag is off (S1402: No), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64. Therefore, as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 8B) is set (S1404).

  Then, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. The display mode for the corresponding jackpot is set (S1405).

  In other words, the jackpot type selected by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404, that is, the 15R probability variable jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot 1R based on whether the maximum number of rounds is 4R probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 4 rounds, or 15R normal jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds In the case of a variation effect accompanying the start winning at the ball entrance 64, the display mode (LED 37Ab lighting state) of the first symbol display device 37A is set, and in the case of a variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640, The display mode of the first symbol display device 37B (the lighting state of the LED 37Bb) is set.

  Also, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is the stop type Set as

  Here, in the case of winning a big hit with a winning at the first entrance 64, the jackpot type is ¼ according to the jackpot type table for “first entrance” (see FIG. 8B). 15R probability variation jackpot with probability (= 25/100), 15R normal jackpot probability with 1/4 (= 25/100), and 4R probability variation jackpot with probability of 1/2 (= 50/100).

  On the other hand, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the jackpot type is ½ according to the jackpot type table for “second entrance” (see FIG. 8B). 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of (= 50/100), 15R normal jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 4R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100).

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Next, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1406). The determination of the variation pattern is based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal, short-running, or probabilistic variation), the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 8C). Based on. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A is set to the second entrance 640 in the case of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64. In the case of a fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning, the display time of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the game is not a big hit (S1401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1407). In the process of S1307, in the case of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A is used, and the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 is performed. In this case, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third mode is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, whether the front / rear out of reach, the reach other than the front / rear out, or the complete out is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1408). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal, short-running, or probability variation), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern for detachment. This is performed based on the table 202d (the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, the variation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, in the case of a variation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A is set and the second entrance 640 is entered. In the case of a fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning, the display time of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

  When the process of S1406 or the process of S1408 is completed, the variation pattern type determined in the process of S1406 or S1408 is changed to the special figure 1 (various effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64) or the special figure 2 ( A variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is set including special figure type information indicating whether or not the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S1409).

  Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1405 or S1407 is set (S1410). These change pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21). The

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S1106). The through gate passing process (S1106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. Is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4. In the through gate passing process, the first through gate passing command and the second through gate passing command for notifying the passage of the sphere in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Process.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 (S1501). Here, the passage of the ball through the first through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 (S1501: Yes), the first through gate that notifies the audio lamp control device 113 that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67. A passing command is set (S1502). The first through gate passage command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21).

  Next, the value of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved balls M in the variable display of the second symbol M) is acquired, and the value (M) of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether it is less than (S1503).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the first through gate 67 (S1501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the first through gate 67, the value (M) of the usual reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1506. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first through gate 67 (S1501: Yes) and the value (M) of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the general-purpose reserved ball number counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S1504). Then, it is obtained from the counter buffer of the value RAM 203 of the second random number counter C4, and is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (general reserved first to fourth areas) of the general reserved ball storage area 203i. (S1505), the process proceeds to S1506.

  In the process of S1505, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203f after the addition in S1504 is referred to. If the value is 1, the normal figure reservation first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the map reserved second area is set, if the value is 3, the map reserved third area is set, and if the value is 4, the map reserved fourth area is set first. The area.

  In the processing of S1506, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506). Here, the passage of the ball through the second through gate 670 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506: Yes), the second through gate that notifies the audio lamp control device 113 that the ball has passed through the second through gate 67. A passing command is set (S1507). The second through gate passage command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21).

  Next, the value of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved balls M in the variable display of the second symbol M) is acquired, and the value (M) of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether it is less than (S1508).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second through gate 670, the value (M) of the usual reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S1508: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second through gate 670 (S1508: Yes) and the value (M) of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1508: Yes), the general-purpose reserved ball number counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S1509). Then, it is obtained from the counter buffer of the value RAM 203 of the second random number counter C4, and is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (general reserved first to fourth areas) of the general reserved ball storage area 203i. (S1510), the process ends.

  Note that in the process of S1510, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203f after the addition in S1509 is referred to. If the value is 1, the normal figure reservation first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the map reserved second area is set, if the value is 3, the map reserved third area is set, and if the value is 4, the map reserved fourth area is set first. The area.

  Next, referring to FIG. 19, it is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1551), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1611 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701).

  Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 14) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Also, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 15) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, by this external output processing, the large opening 65a is opened / closed in the special pattern when the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, and the big hit are necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. In this case, a command necessary for displaying various screens on the third symbol display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the movement type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then the large opening 65a is in the special game state at the big hit. In accordance with the opening / closing operation (closing condition), a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the large opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (ordinary symbol, for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is held in the ordinary holding ball storage area 203i as the ball passes through the second entrance (through gate) 267, The value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i is shifted to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j. At this time, each hold, such as the 2nd area of the general map hold → the 1st area of the general map hold, the 3rd area of the general map hold → the 2nd area of the general map hold, the 4th area of the general map hold → the 3rd area of the general map hold The value of the second random number counter in the area is also shifted.

  Then, when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j matches the random number value to be won, the lottery is performed (win lottery). After the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the second symbol on the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed, and the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed. The electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, as a result of the winning lottery, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the ordinary figure holding ball execution area 203j does not match the winning random number value, After the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the second symbol, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed. In this case, the electric accessory 640a remains in the closed state.

  It should be noted that different random numbers are set depending on whether the gaming state is normal, during a short time, or during probability change. In other words, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the value is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the game state is normal and is a win. On the other hand, there are 250 random number values that can be won when the game state is shorter or more likely, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1 to 250”, it is determined that the game state is winning when the gaming state is short-running or probable.

  In addition, the variation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal. Furthermore, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined to be the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is released for a longer time when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also shorter than normal, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times (enlarged state) is increased. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  After the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 19 has been executed, the power-off process after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1920 (see FIG. 23) is performed by an instant voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 23), it executes a power-off process in S1920. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1920 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S1920. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  On the other hand, if the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), this startup process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process at S1820, the sound lamp control is performed. The MPU 221 of the device 113 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). Transition to processing. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1920 is executed (see S1919 in FIG. 23). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1920 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1920 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1809 is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is reached via the process in S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1901 was executed (S1901). If the time has not elapsed (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1913 without performing the processes in S1902 to S1912.

  In S1901, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is determined in S1902 to S912 in relation to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1913, the right-handed / left-handed determination process of S1914, the main command determination process of S1915, and the voice reproduction setting process of S1916 in a short cycle.

  By executing the main command determination process of S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. The voice reproduction setting process of S1916 is executed in a short cycle, so that the reception of the display command transmitted from the display control device 114 is prevented from being missed, and the third display indicated by the display command without delay based on the display command. It is possible to set sound reproduction according to the display content of the symbol display device 81.

  By executing the fluctuation display process of S1913 in a short cycle, the setting relating to the fluctuation effect can be performed without delay based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received by the main command determination process. In addition, the right-handed / left-handed determination process of S1914 is executed in a short cycle, so that the player is not delayed based on the first through-gate passage command and the second through-gate passage command received by the main command determination process. The third symbol display device 81 can display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed” or “left-handed”.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1916 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1902). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1909), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, in accordance with a display command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, a reproduction sound data storage area 223d is obtained in a sound reproduction setting process (S1916) described later. The audio data stored in the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 are decoded, the decoded audio of all channels is mixed, and sound is output from the audio output device 226. When an alarm sound output is set, an alarm sound output pattern is set by the sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is output from the sound output device 226.

  After the process of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1909 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S1911, a counter update process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. In the counter update process, various counters used by the MPU 221 are updated. For example, the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate are updated in the process of S1912. The update of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is maintained at 0 when the value is 0, while when the value is 1 to 9999, the value is set to 1. When the value is 10000, initialization is performed to 0.

  The first through-gate time counter 223h is set to 1 when a first through-gate passage command is received from the main controller 110, and the second through-gate time counter 223i is second from the main controller 110. 1 is set when a through gate passing command is received. By updating the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate 223i and the second through gate 223i by the counter update processing executed every 1 millisecond, for each of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, The time from the passage of the sphere to the passage of 10 seconds can be counted.

  In the counter update process (S1912), the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j is set to 0 in accordance with the time counter 22h after passing through the first through gate being set to 0. Similarly, the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k is set to 0 as the after-second-gate passing time counter 22i is set to 0.

  In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Then, a variable display process, which is a process for setting these generated commands to be transmitted to the display control device 114, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variation display process, a right-handed / left-handed determination process is executed (S1914). This right-handed / left-handed determination process is performed when the player is determined to be left-handed when the game state is short-running or probabilistic, and a batting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-handed ball is displayed. When it is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and it is determined that the player is hitting right when the gaming state is normal, a third direction display screen for instructing the player to make a left strike which is advantageous to the player This is a process of displaying on the symbol display device 81. Details of the right-handed / left-handed determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a main command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1915). Details of the main command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the main command determination process, in accordance with the display command received from the display control device 114, an audio reproduction setting process for setting audio data matching the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d is executed. (S1916). The audio data set in S1916 is decoded by the sound editing / output processing in S1910, and the sound is reproduced from the audio output device 226. Details of the sound reproduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1916 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1917). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1917 (S1917: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown processing flag are turned on (S1919), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1920). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1921), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1918), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1918: No), the process returns to the process of S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the main command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the main command determination process (S1915). This main command determination processing (S1915) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Then, processing corresponding to the received command is performed. Details of the main command determination process will be described below.

  In the main command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the main control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Whether or not is received (S2001). If it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S2001: Yes), the variation pattern type of the variation effect to be started from the variation pattern command (normal reach various types, super reach various types, special reach various types, short deviation, long (Ex.) Is extracted (S2002), and further, it is shown whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start winning at the second entrance 640. The special figure type information is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process.

  The variation pattern type and special figure type information extracted here are stored in the RAM 223. The variation pattern type is used when setting a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type in the variation display process (see FIG. 25) described later. . Further, the special figure type information is obtained when the value of either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is decreased by 1 in accordance with the start of the variable effect in the fluctuation display process. To be referenced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2003). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command (15R probability variation per unit, 4R probability variation per unit, 15R The normal jackpot, complete miss, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach) are extracted and stored in the RAM 233 (S2005). Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  By setting the variation start flag to ON, the start of the variation effect is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to start the variation effect. The stop type is a display stop for notifying the stop symbol in order to determine the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started and to display the stop symbol with the determined stop symbol in the later-described variation display process (see FIG. 25). Used when setting a type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not a special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). If it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64, which is held in the main controller 110, is extracted, and this is stored in the special figure 1 held ball counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113. Store (S2007).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are added together, and the total value is the number of the third design variation effects held in the main controller 110. Is set as a reserved ball number command for display to notify the display control device 114 (S2008), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display controller 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the display controller 114 displays the reserved ball number symbols (● symbols) for the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command in the hold display area of the third symbol display device 81. Display on Db.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2009). ). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received (S2009: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640, which is reserved in the main controller 110, is extracted and is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223 b of the voice lamp controller 113. Store (S2010). Then, the process proceeds to S2008, and as described above, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are added together, and the total value (total number of held balls) Is displayed (S2008), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2009: No), it is then determined whether or not a second through gate passage command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2011). . If it is determined that the second through gate passage command has been received (S2011: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the second entrance 640, so the second through gate passage flag 223g is set to ON. In step S2012, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second through gate passage command has not been received (S2011: No), it is then determined whether or not the first through gate passage command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2013). If it is determined that the first through gate passage command has been received (S2013: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the first entrance 64, so the first through gate passage flag 223f is set to ON. In step S2014, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first through-gate passage command has not been received (S2013: No), it is then determined whether a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2015). If it is determined that a confirmation command has been received (S2015: Yes), first, a display confirmation command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the third symbol is set (S2016). The display confirmation command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 confirms and displays the variation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 with the stop symbol notified in advance by the display stop type command.

  After the process of S2016, it is determined from the stop type extracted by the process of S2005 and stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the stop symbol fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a probable big hit (S2017). If it is a probable big hit (S2017: Yes), 0 is set to the hour / short time counter (not shown) (S2018). In the present embodiment, the game state is set to a short time while a variable effect is performed 100 times after a normal big hit. The time-count counter is for counting 100 fluctuation effects after a normal jackpot, and is normally set to “100” when the jackpot is won, and every time a deviation is confirmed and displayed in the subsequent fluctuation effects. 1 is subtracted. When the time-count counter reaches 0, the gaming state is returned from the time-short to normal. If the normal win is again made during the time reduction, the time reduction counter is set to “100” again to return the number of variable effects in which the time reduction state continues to 100 again. Also, if the probability variation is a big hit during the time reduction, the time reduction counter is set to zero. In this case, the gaming state is in the process of being probable, and is maintained in the probabilistic state until the next jackpot is established.

  After the processing of S2018, the probability change time short flag 223e is set to ON (S2021), indicating that the gaming state is being changed. Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  As a result of the process of S2017, when it is determined that the stop symbol that is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not a probable big hit (S2017: No), then whether or not the stop symbol that is definitely displayed is a normal big hit Is determined (S2019). As a result, if it is a normal jackpot (S2019: Yes), 100 is set in the hourly number counter (S2020). As a result, 100 variation effects are counted after the gaming state becomes shorter, and when the lost variation effect is repeated 100 times, the gaming state is changed from being shorter to normal. After the process of S2020, the probability change time-short flag 223e is set to ON (S2021), indicating that the gaming state is short. Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  As a result of the processing of S2019, when it is determined that the stop symbol that is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not usually a big hit (S2017: No), the stop symbol is a missed symbol. Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is greater than 0 (S2022). If the time reduction counter is 0 (S2022: No), the main command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. . On the other hand, if the hourly / counter counter is larger than 0 (S2022: Yes), the hourly / counter counter is decremented by 1 (S2023), and it is determined whether or not the hourly / counter counter after subtraction is 0 (S2024).

  As a result, when the time-count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (S2023: Yes), since the variation effect that is out of play has been repeated 100 times after the gaming state becomes time-short, the probability variation time-short flag 223e is turned off. (S2025), indicating that the gaming state is normal. Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the time counter after subtraction is not 0 as a result of the process of S2023 (S2023: No), the main command determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, the gaming state is maintained in a short time.

  If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing in S2015 (S2015: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2026). If no other command has been received (S2026: No), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S2026: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S2027), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the fluctuation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation display process (S1913). This variation display processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. Therefore, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and the generated display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated. Is set to be transmitted to the control device 114.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from the main controller 110. The fluctuation display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then the variation pattern command in the processing of S2102 of the main command determination processing (see FIG. 24). The variation pattern type (various reach, super-reach, special reach, short out, long out) in the extracted variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2105. And obtained from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the value of the counter for determining the detailed variation pattern provided in the RAM 223 and the value of the counter for determining the stop symbol, and the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103, the details A fluctuation pattern and a stop pattern are determined (S2104). Here, the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is defined only for the variation time. By this S2104, various detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time are specified. One variation pattern is selected from among them, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed. Further, the stop types notified by the stop type command from the main controller 110 indicate rough stop types such as 15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, complete loss, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach. The stop symbol suitable for the stop type is determined by the processing of S2104.

  When a detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern is then generated, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. (S2105). In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol determined by the processing of S2104 is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start display control of fluctuating effects. In addition, the display control device 114 receives the stop type command for display, and when displaying the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command, the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. indicate.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 manages the reserved ball as it is consumed (that is, the variation effect corresponding to the reserved ball is set). In order to reduce the number of held balls, first, from the special figure type information extracted in the process of S2002, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect to be started this time is associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64, that is, special figure 1. (S2107), if it is a fluctuation according to the special figure 1 (S2107: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (S2108). On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2107, when it is determined that the variation effect to start this time is associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, that is, the variation according to the special drawing 2 (S2107: No). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 202b (S2109).

  Then, after the processing of S2108 or S2109, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are added, and the added value is held in the main controller 110. A display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 as the number of variation effects of the third symbol is set (S2110), the variation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  The display reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display controller 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the display controller 114 displays the reserved ball number symbols (● symbols) for the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command in the hold display area of the third symbol display device 81. Display on Db.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the right-handed / left-handed determination process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the right-handed / left-handed determination process (S1914). This variation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, when the gaming state is short-running or probabilistic changing. When it is determined that the player is left-handed, a ball-direction instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-handed shot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the player is hitting right, the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to make a left strike that is advantageous to the player.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, right-handed / left-handed determination processing (S1914) will be described. In the right-handed / left-handed determination process (S1914), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit (special game state) is in progress (S2201). If the big hit is in the middle (S2201: Yes), the first through gate passing flag 223f and After the second through gate passage flag 223g is reset to OFF (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed determination process is terminated.

  That is, in the case of a big hit, the right-handed / left-handed determination process is not performed. In the case of a big hit, regardless of whether the game state immediately before the big hit of the pachinko machine 10 is in the midst of certainty, short time, or normal, the fluctuation effect that became a big hit is also due to the start winning to the first entrance 64 Depending on whether it is due to the start winning to the second winning ball opening 640, either the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. To do. For this reason, it is possible to indicate to the player which direction the ball should be fired by opening / closing the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is hit, the process is terminated without performing the right-handed / left-handed determination.

  However, in the case of a big hit, when the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes, the specific winning port of the first variable winning device 65 is determined when it is determined that the player is hitting right. In the case where the left-hand hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the left-handed ball 65a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened / closed, the player is left-handed. Even if it is determined that the ball has been hit, the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the right hitting that makes it easy for the ball to win in the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Good.

  If the result of the processing in S2201 is not a big hit (S2201: No), it is then determined whether or not the probability change short flag 223e is off (S2202). As a result, if the probability change time short flag 223e is off (S2202: Yes), the gaming state is normal. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the player is making a right turn, first, it is determined whether or not the second through gate passage flag 223g is on (S2203). As a result, if the second through gate passage flag 223g is off (S2203: No), the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to off (S2219), and the left-handed left The hit determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the result of the processing in S2203 is that the second through gate passage flag 223g is on (S2203: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the second through gate passage time counter 223i is 0 (S2204). As a result, if the second through-gate passing time counter 223i is 0 (S2204: Yes), the second through-gate passing time counter 223i is set to 1, and the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k is set. 1 is set (S2205). Then, after the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed determination processing is ended.

  As a result of the processing of S2204, when the second through-gate passing time counter 223i is not 0 (S2204: No), it is next determined whether or not the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k is 2 (S2207). ). As a result, when the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is 1 instead of 2 (S2207: No), 1 is added to the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k (S2210), and the first through gate passing After the flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k is 2 as a result of the process of S2207 (S2207: Yes), the process proceeds to S2208. Here, as described above, the update of the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is performed every millisecond by the process of S1912 of the main process (see FIG. 23), and when the value is 0, it is maintained at 0. On the other hand, when the value is 1 to 9999, 1 is added to the value, and when the value is 10,000, the value is initialized to 0.

  Therefore, it is determined by the process of S2204 that the second through-gate passing time counter 223i is not 0 (S2204: No), and the value of the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k is 2 by the process of S2207. If it is determined (S2207: Yes), it means that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 on the right side of the game board within a short time of 10 seconds or less. Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the player may have hit the right. On the other hand, when the game state is normal, left-handed is more advantageous for the player as described above.

  Therefore, in this case, a left-handed instruction screen display command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set (S2208). The display control device 114 receives this left-handed instruction screen display command, and displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left-handed” shown in FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to direct the player to “left strike” the ball, and the player can entertain the game in an advantageous state.

  After the processing of S2208, the second through-gate passing time counter 223i is set to 0, the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k is set to 0 (S2209), the first through-gate passing flag 223f and the second through-gate passing flag 223f After the through gate passage flag 223g is reset to OFF (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S2202 that the probability change time reduction flag 223e is on (S2202: No), the gaming state is in the probability change or time reduction. Therefore, the process proceeds to S2211 in FIG.

  In the process of S2211, in order to determine whether or not the player is left-handed, it is first determined whether or not the first through gate passage flag 223f is on (S2211). As a result, if the first through gate passage flag 223f is off (S2211: No), the process proceeds to S2219 in FIG. 26, and the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to off. After that (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, returning to FIG. 27, if the first through gate passage flag 223f is on (S2211: Yes) as a result of the processing of S2211, then it is determined whether or not the first through gate passage time counter 223h is zero. (S2212). As a result, if the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is 0 (S2212: Yes), the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is set to 1 and the ball counter 223j passing through the first through gate is set. 1 is set (S2213). Then, the process proceeds to S2219 in FIG. 26, and the first through-gate passage flag 223f and the second through-gate passage flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), and the right-handed / left-handed determination process is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 27, if the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is not 0 (S2212: No) as a result of the processing of S2212, then whether or not the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j is 2 or not. Is determined (S2215). As a result, when the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j is 1 instead of 2 (S2215: No), 1 is added to the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j (S2218), and S2219 in FIG. The process proceeds to processing, and after resetting the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed determination processing is finished.

  On the other hand, returning to FIG. 27, if the value of the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j is 2 as a result of the process of S2215 (S2215: Yes), the process proceeds to S2216. Here, as described above, the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is updated every 1 millisecond by the process of S1912 of the main process (see FIG. 23), and when the value is 0, it is maintained at 0. On the other hand, when the value is 1 to 9999, 1 is added to the value, and when the value is 10,000, the value is initialized to 0.

  Therefore, it is determined by the process of S2212 that the first through-gate passage time counter 223h is not 0 (S2212: No), and the value of the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j is 2 by the process of S2215. If it is determined (S2215: Yes), it means that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 on the left side of the game board within a short time of 10 seconds or less. Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the player may have left-handed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the midst of probability change or time saving, as described above, right-handed is more advantageous for the player.

  Therefore, in this case, a right-handed instruction screen display command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set (S2216). The display control device 114 receives the right-handed instruction screen display command, and displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed” shown in FIG. 10B on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to direct the player to “right hit” the ball, and the player can entertain the game in an advantageous state.

  After the process of S2216, 0 is set in the first through-gate passing time counter 223h, the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j is set to 0 (S2217), and the process proceeds to S2219 in FIG. After the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to OFF (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed determination process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the operation and effect of the right-handed / left-handed determination process will be described. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the passing of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right hit” when the gaming state is in the probability change or in the short time. (A) is a figure showing an example when only two spheres passed through the first through gate 67 for 10 seconds, and (b) shows the first through gate 67 for 10 seconds. It is the figure which showed the example when a sphere passed at least 3 spheres.

  Note that FIG. 28 shows the case where the gaming state is probabilistic or short-running. However, when the gaming state is normal, the ball passing through the second through gate 67 and a hit ball that instructs “left-handed” The relationship with the display of the direction indication screen is also the relationship between the passing of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of the hitting direction indication screen for instructing “right-handed” when the gaming state is being probabilistically changing or during a short time. Since it is the same, explanation is omitted.

  In FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the first through gate passage flag 223g is on, it means that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67. Further, it means that when the output of the right-handed instruction screen display command is “Yes”, the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed”.

  In the case where the gaming state is in the midst of probability change or short time, when only two balls pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, as shown in FIG. When the counter 223 i is 0 and the first ball passes through the first through gate 67, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223 i is counted up to 1. If the second ball passes through the first through gate 67 before 10 seconds have elapsed since the count up, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up to two. However, when 10 seconds elapse after the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223i is first counted up, the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223i is also updated by the counter update process (S1912) of the main process (see FIG. 23). Initialized to 0. As a result, when only two balls pass through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds, the right-handed instruction screen display command is not output to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 The hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right hit” can be hidden.

  On the other hand, in the case where the gaming state is in the process of changing the probability or in the short time, when three or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, as shown in FIG. When the gate passing ball number counter 223i is 0 and the first ball passes through the first through gate 67, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up to 1. If the second ball passes through the first through gate 67 before 10 seconds have elapsed since the count up, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up to two. Furthermore, if the third ball passes through the first through gate 67 before the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i has counted up to 10 seconds, S2216 of the right-handed / left-handed determination process (FIG. 27). ), A right-handed instruction screen display command is output to the display control device 114. As a result, when the gaming state is in a probable change or in a short time, if three or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds, it is determined that the player is left-handed and the third symbol The display device 81 can display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right hit”.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, when it is advantageous for the player to hit the right, only one ball passes through the through gate on the left side of the game board, and the player makes a left strike. Some of them have made notifications instructing “right-handed”. However, even if the player is right-handed, it is possible that some balls will flow down the left side of the game board, and that ball is on the left side of the game board. Passing through the through gate can also occur sufficiently. Each time, “right-handed” is instructed, the player is troublesome. In addition, even if the player is left-handed, every time a ball passes through the through gate, if a notification is given that instructs “right-handed”, the notification will occur frequently. After all, it makes the player feel annoying.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing or shortening time, by detecting that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, it is in the process of changing or reducing the time. Then, a right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display on the third symbol display device 81 a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed” which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, the game is performed in the normal state by detecting that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 within 10 seconds. A left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display on the third symbol display device 81 a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left-handed” which is advantageous to the user. As a result, even though the player is firing the ball in an advantageous direction, a screen instructing the direction of the hitting ball is displayed each time a part of the balls are launched in a direction different from the advantageous direction. It can be suppressed. Moreover, even if the player is firing a ball in a direction different from the advantageous direction, it is possible to suppress the frequent display of the screen for instructing the hitting direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being hampered by the screen for instructing the hitting direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process (S1916) performed by MPU221 in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the sound reproduction setting process (S1916). In the sound reproduction setting process (S1916), as described above, according to the display command received from the display control device 114, sound data matching the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is set in the reproduction sound data storage area 223d. It is processing. Further, in this audio reproduction setting process, when two reach sounds are being reproduced, a process of stopping the reproduction of the most recently reached reach sound (normal reach sound that has been started later) is also performed.

  In this audio reproduction setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is 2 (S2301). The reach sound reproduction counter 223c counts the number of reach sounds being reproduced. If the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is not 2 but 0 or 1 (S2301: No), that is, if the reach sound is not reproduced or only one reach sound is reproduced, then the RAM 223 is used. Among the unprocessed commands, the first display command received from the display control device 114 is read and analyzed from the display control command storage area provided in, and it is determined whether or not a reach display command has been received (S2302).

  If a reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), it is further determined whether another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), the audio data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is stored from the audio data storage area 222. The data is read and set to the empty channel areas of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and the audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the reach audio reproduction in progress counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2309), and the audio reproduction setting process is terminated. If it is determined as a result of the processing in S2307 that no other display command has been received (S2307: No), the audio reproduction setting processing is terminated as it is.

  If the reach display command is received as a result of the processing of S2302 (S2302: Yes), the reach sound data corresponding to the reach design indicated by the reach display command is displayed as the 0th design in the audio data storage area 222a. Read out from the normal reach audio data 222a0, the first symbol probability reach audio data 222a1, the second symbol normal reach audio data 222a2,... The ninth probability change reach audio data 222a9, and the first to first in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d. The fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 are set as empty channel areas, and the reproduction of reach sound is started (S2303). Then, 1 is added to the reach sound reproduction counter 223c (S2304), and the sound reproduction setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is 2 as a result of the processing in S2301 (S2301: Yes), since two reach sounds are being reproduced, the most recently reached reach is reproduced. The reproduction of the voice, that is, the reach voice that has started to be reproduced last is stopped (S2305). Then, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2306), and the voice reproduction setting process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the effect | action and effect by performing this audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process are demonstrated. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of reach sound when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped from the low-speed display and double reach is performed. Is displayed, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the type of reach symbol for which the probability variation reach is established. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and thereafter, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established probability variation reach. Probability reach voice corresponding to is output. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the probability variation reach voice is played back as soon as it is started. Further, when the probability change reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach, this time, the reach design (main design) that established the normal reach. The normal reach sound corresponding to is output. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the normal reach sound is reproduced in the silent section for the first 20 milliseconds when the reproduction is started. Further, when the normal reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the value of the reach sound playback counter 223c reaches 2, the sound lamp control device 114 stops the playback of the most recently played reach sound, that is, the normal reach sound that has been started later. As a result, when double reach is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, two of the probability variation reach sound and the normal reach sound are once played, but the normal reach sound is immediately stopped. Only the probability change reach sound is played to the end. Since the normal reach sound is a silent period for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, the normal reach sound is stopped during the silent period. .

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the sound lamp control device displays a command for notifying “establishment of probability change reach” as the display content of the third symbol display device, When the display control device receives a command to notify “reach establishment”, the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound are superimposed and output from the sound output device. However, as described above, when the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it was difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make each reach sound easy to hear by outputting the words that are produced by each sound in the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound. The timing of the words to be uttered must be synchronized, and each reach voice becomes uniform with only different voices and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach sound in a strictly synchronized manner, and to output the words that are uttered by each sound completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probability variation symbol) that establish double reach, There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach sound corresponding to the reach design (main design) indicated by the received reach display command is firstly received. On the other hand, if the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is “2” and the number of reach sounds being reproduced is two, the most recently reached reach sound, that is, the normal reach that has started reproduction later Stop playing audio. As a result, when double reach is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, two of the probability variation reach sound and the normal reach sound are once played, but the normal reach sound is immediately stopped. Only the probability change reach sound is played to the end. Since the normal reach sound is a silent period for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, the normal reach sound is stopped during the silent period. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established probability variation reach, and thereafter Immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach, and in the audio lamp control device 113, first, according to the received reach display command, The playback of two reach sounds is started in order. If the sound lamp control device 113 determines that two reach sounds are being reproduced, the sound lamp control device 113 stops the reproduction of the reach sound that has been most recently started (reach sound that has been started later). As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. In other words, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  The reach sound playback counter 223c stops the playback of the most recently played reach sound (normal reach sound that has been started later) because the value of the reach sound playback counter 223c is "2". In accordance with this, it is initialized to “0”. Since the reproduction of the probability variable reach sound is continued, the value of the reach sound playback counter 223c should be set to “1”. However, the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is used to stop the reproduction of the normal reach sound reproduced later when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the stop control is performed, the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least while the probability variation reach sound is being reproduced. Therefore, if the reach sound playback counter 223c is initialized to “0” in conjunction with stopping the playback of the most recently played reach sound (normal reach sound that has been started later), the reach sound is being played back. Since the counter 223c is initialized to “0”, it is not necessary to determine whether to stop the reproduction of the probability-change reach sound, so that the processing can be simplified.

  The reach sound reproduction counter 2232c is also initialized to “0” when a display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the sound lamp control device 113. When other display commands are received while the reach sound is being reproduced, the reach sound is continuously reproduced. Therefore, the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c should be set to “1”. However, the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is used to stop the reproduction of the normal reach sound reproduced later when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two reach display commands are continuously transmitted from the display control device 81, and the reach sound is reproduced. When another display command is received, it can be determined that the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, at least while the reach sound is being reproduced, the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when other display commands other than the reach display command are received from the display control device 114 by the sound lamp control device 113, the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is initialized to “0”, and the reach sound reproduction is performed. Since the middle counter 223c is initialized to “0”, it is not necessary to determine whether to stop the reproduction of reach sound, so that the processing can be simplified.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The MPU 231 is broadly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V-interrupt process executed in the case of The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start is normally started.

  After the processing of S2401, interrupt permission is set (S2402). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 13) is created and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  In this V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a. To the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 and the aspect of the continuous notice effect are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the aspect The image drawing can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the display setting process (S2603), in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the command determination process (S1402) or the like, the third symbol display device is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b. In 81, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specifically specified. In addition, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, if the display contents (see FIG. 12) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, A display command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the display content is generated, and processing for transmitting the generated display command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when a plurality of display contents are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the display contents are sequentially displayed from the display contents specified in advance. A display command is generated, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, when the double reach is established in the 3rd symbol display device 81, first, the probability variation reach is established as the display content at the address at which the establishment of the double reach is displayed in the display data table. “Probability reach establishment” is defined together with the main symbol type, and then “normal reach establishment” is defined together with the main symbol type that established the normal reach. Therefore, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach, and then immediately performs normal reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design established.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a command (for example, display variation) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like in the display control device 114 by the command determination process and the display setting process. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 according to the pattern command), etc., the display data table should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. The effect image can be changed.

  When the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, it is complicated and complicated with the diversification of effect images. Since an enormous load is applied to the process of starting up and executing an enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, a task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603). In addition to specifying, for each sprite, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S1406). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1404), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1405) are used. 13 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first displays the probability variation reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol established, and then a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established. . On the other hand, when receiving the reach display command, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command. Then, when it is determined that the number of the reach voices being reproduced has become two, the reproduction of the reach voice that has been most recently started (the normal reach voice that has been started later) is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, whether the probability reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is double reach or single reach, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design for which probability change reach is established to the sound lamp control device 113, and when 10 milliseconds have elapsed, a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is sent to the sound lamp. It transmits to the control apparatus 113. When the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 that the reach has been established together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability variation reach. The point that the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach immediately after transmitting the reach display command is the same as in the first embodiment. However, in the second embodiment, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach together with the type of reach design that established the reach to the sound lamp control device 114, and then changes the probability. A normal reach sound reproduction stop command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 114 when 10 milliseconds have elapsed since the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol that has established reach. This is different from the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a normal reach sound reproduction command from the display control device 114, if there is one reach sound being reproduced at that time, the probability change transmitted before that is changed. Based on the reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established reach, only the probability-variable reach sound is output, so the output of the probability-change reach sound is continued. On the other hand, when two reach voices are being played when the normal reach voice play command is received from the display control device 114, double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the probability variation reach is established. Based on the reach display command for notifying reach establishment with the type of reach symbol and the reach display command for notifying reach establishment with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established, the probability variation reach speech and the normal reach speech Are reproduced, the sound lamp control device 113 continues the output of the probability variation reach sound and stops the output of the normal reach sound.

  Note that, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a part of the audio playback setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 establish a probability variation reach. After a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the type of reach design made, a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 after 10 milliseconds have elapsed. And is the same as in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 33 explains the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. In this audio reproduction setting process, the process of S2311 is executed instead of the process of S2301 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29).

  In the processing of S2311, the first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is read from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received. It is determined whether or not (S2311). If the normal reach sound reproduction stop command has not been received, the same processing of S2302 to S2304 and S2307 to S2309 as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2311, if a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is 2 (S2312).

  As a result, if the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is not 2 (S2312: No), the audio reproduction setting process is terminated as it is. When the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received (S2311: Yes) and the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is not 2 (S2312: No), the probability change reach as the single reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After a reach display command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 and a reach display command is sent to notify the establishment of reach together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach, This is a case where a reach voice reproduction stop command is received. Therefore, in this case, only the probability variation reach sound is reproduced, and the reproduction of the probability variation reach sound can be continued by ending the sound reproduction setting process as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is 2 as a result of the processing of S2312, (S2312: Yes), the same processing of S2305 and S2306 as in the first embodiment is executed. In other words, in the processing of S2305, the reproduction of the most recently played reach sound, that is, the reach sound that has started to be played last is stopped (S2305).

  When the value of the reach voice playback counter 223c is 2 (S2312: Yes) when the normal reach voice playback stop command is received (S2311: Yes), double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the reach display command for notifying reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that has established probability reach, and the reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach This is a case where the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received while the probability change reach sound and the normal reach sound are being reproduced. Therefore, in this case, the reproduction of the normal reach sound can be stopped by stopping the reproduction of the reach sound that has been most recently started by the process of S2305.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34, the effect | action and effect by performing this audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process are demonstrated. FIG. 34 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of reach sound when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 34 (b) is an illustration on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reproduction | regeneration of reach audio | voice when the single reach of probability variation reach is displayed.

  First, referring to FIG. 34 (a), in the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is slow. When the display is stopped from the display and the double reach is established and displayed, the display control device 114 first displays the probability variation reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. A reach display command is sent to notify the establishment of a reach along with the type of reach that has been established, and then a reach display command is sent to notify the establishment of a reach together with the type of reach that has been established. To do.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established probability variation reach. Probability reach voice corresponding to is output. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the probability variation reach voice is played back as soon as it is started. Further, when the probability change reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach, this time, the reach design (main design) that established the normal reach. The normal reach sound corresponding to is output. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the normal reach sound is reproduced in the silent section for the first 20 milliseconds when the reproduction is started. Further, when the normal reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established probability variation reach, a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is sent to the sound lamp control device 10 milliseconds after the transmission. It transmits to 113. If the value of the reach audio playback counter 223c is 2 when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach audio playback stop command, it will start playback of the most recently played reach audio, that is, later The normal reach sound playback is stopped. As a result, when double reach is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the probability reach reach sound and the normal reach sound are once reproduced, but the normal reach sound is reproduced with the probability change reach sound. When about 10 milliseconds have elapsed, the reproduction is stopped, and only the probability variable reach sound is reproduced to the end. Since the normal reach sound is a silent period for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, the normal reach sound is stopped during the silent period. .

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the sound lamp control device displays a command for notifying “establishment of probability change reach” as the display content of the third symbol display device, When the display control device receives a command to notify “reach establishment”, the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound are superimposed and output from the sound output device. However, as described above, when the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it was difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make each reach sound easy to hear by outputting the words that are produced by each sound in the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound. The timing of the words to be uttered must be synchronized, and each reach voice becomes uniform with only different voices and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach sound in a strictly synchronized manner, and to output the words that are uttered by each sound completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probability variation symbol) that establish double reach, There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach sound corresponding to the reach design (main design) indicated by the received reach display command is firstly received. On the other hand, when the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114, the reproduction of the most recently reached reach sound, that is, the normal reach sound that is started later is stopped. As a result, when double reach is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, two of probability variation reach sound and normal reach sound are once played, but normal reach sound starts reproduction of probability change reach sound. The reproduction is stopped in about 10 milliseconds after being performed, and only the probability-variable reach sound is reproduced to the end. Since the normal reach sound is a silent period for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, the normal reach sound is stopped during the silent period. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established probability variation reach, and thereafter Immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach, and in the audio lamp control device 113, first, according to the received reach display command, The playback of two reach sounds is started in order. Then, after receiving the normal reach sound playback stop command after the two reach sounds are played back, the sound lamp control device 113 plays back the reach sound that has recently started playing (the reach sound that has started playing later). Stop. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. In other words, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34 (b), in the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed. When the probability change reach is established as single reach when the low speed display is stopped and displayed, the display control device 114 displays the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 as A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design for which probability change reach is established.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach, it corresponds to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established probability variation reach. Probability reach voice is output. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the probability variation reach voice is played back as soon as it is started. Further, when the probability change reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

  When the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established probability variation reach, a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is sent to the sound lamp control device 10 milliseconds after the transmission. It transmits to 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach sound reproduction stop command and the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is 1, the sound reproduction setting process ends the process as it is. As a result, it is possible to continue outputting the probability-change reach voice.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 temporarily performs double reach according to the reach display command from the display control device 114. After outputting the probability variable reach sound to be configured, the normal reach sound is output, and then it is determined that there are two reach sounds being played back. Reach audio) playback stopped. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when it is determined that there are two reach voices being played back, the reach voice that has recently started playing, that is, the normal reach voice that has been played back later is displayed. Overwrite all audio data with silence data.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment except for a part of the sound reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 35 explains an audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In this audio reproduction setting process, the process of S2321 is executed instead of the process of S2305 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29).

  That is, as a result of the processing of S2301, when it is determined that the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is 2 (S2301: Yes), since two reach sounds are being reproduced, the latest, that is, the last In addition, silent data is overwritten on the audio data set in any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of the reproduction audio data storage area 223d (S2321). Then, after the processing of S2321, the same processing of S2306 as in the first embodiment is executed, and the audio reproduction setting processing is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the effect | action and effect by performing this audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process are demonstrated. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of reach sound when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped from the low-speed display and double reach is performed. Is displayed, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the type of reach symbol for which the probability variation reach is established. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and thereafter, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established probability variation reach. Probability reach voice corresponding to is output. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the probability variation reach voice is played back as soon as it is started. Further, when the probability change reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach, this time, the reach design (main design) that established the normal reach. The normal reach sound corresponding to is output. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the normal reach sound is reproduced in the silent section for the first 20 milliseconds when the reproduction is started. Further, when the normal reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the value of the reach sound playback counter 223c reaches 2, the sound lamp control device 114 has a playback sound data storage area in which the most recently played reach sound, that is, the normal reach sound data that has been played back later is set. The silent data is overwritten on any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of 223d. As a result, silence is continuously output as normal reach sound that has been played back later.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the sound lamp control device displays a command for notifying “establishment of probability change reach” as the display content of the third symbol display device, When the display control device receives a command to notify “reach establishment”, the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound are superimposed and output from the sound output device. However, as described above, when the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it was difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make each reach sound easy to hear by outputting the words that are produced by each sound in the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound. The timing of the words to be uttered must be synchronized, and each reach voice becomes uniform with only different voices and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach sound in a strictly synchronized manner, and to output the words that are uttered by each sound completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probability variation symbol) that establish double reach, There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach sound corresponding to the reach design (main design) indicated by the received reach display command is firstly received. On the other hand, if the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is “2” and the number of reach sounds being reproduced is two, the most recently reached reach sound, that is, the normal reach that has started reproduction later Silence will continue to be played as sound. As a result, when double reach is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, two of probability variation reach sound and normal reach sound are reproduced, but normal reach sound is reproduced as silence, so only probability variation reach sound is reproduced. Will be heard by the player. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment can have the same effect as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment based on the component same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and third embodiments, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a reach display command from the display control device 114, for the time being, it outputs a reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command. did. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a reach display command from the display control device 114, a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds) after receiving the reach display command. Until elapses, even if a display command is received from the display control device 114, the display command is ignored.

  In the fourth embodiment, the normal reach sound does not require a 20 msec silence period as in the first to third embodiments, and the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced in the same manner as the probability variation reach sound. Then, the voiced section such as “Leach!” Is immediately played. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a configuration other than a partial configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221. This is the same as in the first and third embodiments. For example, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability variation reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and thereafter, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment has a reach audio reproduction start time counter 223l instead of the reach audio reproduction in-progress counter 223c of the RAM 223 in the first and third embodiments.

  The time counter 223l after the start of the reach sound reproduction is a counter that measures the elapsed time since the start of the reach sound reproduction. The time counter 223l after the start of reach sound reproduction is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. When the value of the time counter 223l after the start of reach audio reproduction is 0, the value of 0 is maintained.

  When the MPU 223 starts the reach sound reproduction, the MPU 223 sets 1 to the time counter 223l after the start of the reach sound reproduction. When the value of the time counter 223l after the start of the reach sound reproduction becomes a number other than 0, an update process in which 1 is added in the counter update process (S1912 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond. Done. The time counter 223l after the start of reach sound reproduction is set to 0 again when the value reaches 20, and thereafter, the value is maintained at 0. Accordingly, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach sound reproduction can count 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach sound reproduction.

  The reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l is referred to in the voice reproduction setting process (S1916), and while the reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l indicates a value other than 0, a display command is received from the display control device 114. Even if it is received, the display command is ignored.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment.

  In the sound reproduction setting process in the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the time counter 223l after reach sound reproduction start is 0 (S2331). As a result, if the time counter 223l after the start of reach sound reproduction is 0 (S2331: Yes), the first display received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223. The command is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a normal reach sound reproduction stop command has been received (S2302).

  As a result, if the reach display command has been received (S2302: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is converted into the 0th symbol normal reach audio data 222a0 in the audio data storage area 222a, Read out from the first symbol normal reach audio data 222a1, the second symbol normal reach audio data 222a2,..., The ninth probability variable reach audio data 222a9, and the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d. Is set to an empty channel area of ˜223d4, and the reproduction of reach sound is started (S2303).

  Then, 1 is set in the time counter 223l after the start of the reach sound reproduction (S2332). Then, the sound reproduction setting process is terminated. By the processing of S2332, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach audio reproduction is incremented by 1 until the value becomes “20” in the counter update processing (S1912 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond. When “20” is reached, update processing is performed to initialize to “0”. In other words, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach sound reproduction counts 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach sound reproduction.

  If the reach display command has not been received as a result of the process of S2302 (S2302: No), it is then determined whether another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), the audio data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is stored from the audio data storage area 222. The data is read and set to the empty channel areas of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and the audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the sound reproduction setting process is terminated. If no other display command is received as a result of the processing of S2307 (S2307: No), the audio reproduction setting processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2331, when it is determined that the time counter after the start of reach sound reproduction is not 0 (S2331: No), it is determined whether a display command is received (S2333). As a result, if the display command has not been received (S2333: No), the audio reproduction setting process is terminated as it is. If a display command has been received (S2333: Yes), the received display command is deleted (S2334), and the audio reproduction setting process is terminated.

  The time counter 223l after the start of the reach sound reproduction takes a value other than 0 for 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach sound reproduction. Therefore, the display command received from the display control device 114 is ignored for 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the effect | action and effect by performing this audio | voice reproduction | regeneration setting process are demonstrated. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of reach sound when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped from the low-speed display and double reach is performed. Is displayed, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the type of reach symbol for which the probability variation reach is established. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and thereafter, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established probability variation reach. Probability reach voice corresponding to is output. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the probability variation reach voice is played back as soon as it is started. Further, when the probability variation reach sound is output, the value of the time counter 223l after the start of reach sound reproduction becomes 1. Then, the time counter 223l after the start of reach sound reproduction counts 20 milliseconds, and takes a value other than 0 during that time.

  Next, the audio lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design for which normal reach is established. This reach display command is used for the reach design command for which reach variation reach is established. This command is received immediately after the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received together with the type, without passing 20 milliseconds. That is, when the reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received together with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach, the time counter 223l after the start of reach sound reproduction takes a value other than 0. The command is ignored. Therefore, the normal reach sound is not output.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the sound lamp control device displays a command for notifying “establishment of probability change reach” as the display content of the third symbol display device, When the display control device receives a command to notify “reach establishment”, the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound are superimposed and output from the sound output device. However, as described above, when the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it was difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make each reach sound easy to hear by outputting the words that are produced by each sound in the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound. The timing of the words to be uttered must be synchronized, and each reach voice becomes uniform with only different voices and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach sound in a strictly synchronized manner, and to output the words that are uttered by each sound completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probability variation symbol) that establish double reach, There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach display command received first. While the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by is output, the value of the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction is other than 0, and the next reach display command received is ignored. That is, the normal reach sound is not output by the reach display command received later. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established probability variation reach, and thereafter Immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach, and the audio lamp control device 113 follows the reach display command received earlier. Only the reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (as a result, the probability change reach sound) is output. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. In other words, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the normal reach sound is not reproduced at all. Therefore, the normal reach sound does not require the 20 millisecond silent section as in the first to third embodiments. Similar to the probability-variable reach voice, when the normal reach voice starts to be played, it is possible to immediately play a voiced section such as “Leach!”. Therefore, even when the normal reach is displayed as the single reach on the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, it is possible to immediately reproduce the sound “Reach is!”.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments, the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 are provided in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and audio data for reproducing reach audio is provided. In the above description, the case has been described where any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 is set. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in the reproduction audio data storage area 2232d, a reach audio area 223d5 is provided instead of the fourth channel area 223d4, and the audio data for reproducing the reach audio is this reach. The audio area 223d5 is set. Further, even if a reach display command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113 during the reproduction of the reach sound set in the reach sound area 2232d5, the reach display command is ignored.

  In the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the normal reach sound does not require a 20 msec silence period unlike the first to third embodiments, and the normal reach sound starts to be reproduced. When this is done, a voiced segment such as “Leach!” Is played immediately. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has a configuration other than a partial configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221. This is the same as the first, third and fourth embodiments. For example, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability variation reach. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted, and thereafter, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach is established. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. The reproduction audio data storage area 223d of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a reach audio area 223d5 instead of the fourth channel area 223d4. In addition, the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment replaces the reach audio reproduction in-use counter 223c in the first and third embodiments and the reach audio reproduction start time counter 223l in the fourth embodiment, and uses a reach area for the reach of the speech audio. 223m.

  The reach audio area 223d5 is a dedicated area for exclusively storing audio data for reproducing the reach audio. When the MPU 221 receives a reach display command from the display controller 114, the MPU 221 receives voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (the 0th symbol normal reach audio data 222a0, the 1st symbol probability change reach audio data 222a1, 2nd). Any one of the symbol normal reach sound data 222a2,..., And the 9th symbol probability change reach sound data 222a9) is read from the sound data storage area 222a, and the read reach sound data is stored in the reach sound area 223d5.

  The MPU 221 decodes the audio data stored in the first to third channel areas 223d1 to d3 and the reach audio area 223d5 to generate an audio signal. The audio signal generated for each audio reproduction channel is mixed and output to the audio output device 226. As a result, the four audio data can be reproduced simultaneously and output from the audio output device 226.

  The reach audio area in-use flag 223m is a flag indicating that reach audio data is set (stored) in the reach audio area 223m, and that the reach audio is reproduced using the set reach audio data. is there. The reach audio area in-use flag 223m indicates that the reach audio is reproduced using the reach audio data set in the reach audio area 223m when the reach audio on-use flag 223m is on. In addition, when the reach voice area use flag 223m is off, the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223m is used to indicate that the reach voice is not reproduced.

  The reach voice area busy flag 223m is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. Then, the audio lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach audio data is set in the reach audio area 223d5, and the reach audio data set in the reach audio area 223d5 is used. When reach voice output is started, the reach voice area use flag 223m is set to ON. If this reach sound area use flag 223m is on and another reach display command is received from the display controller 114, the reach display command is ignored. Then, when the reproduction of the reach sound using the reach sound data set in the reach sound area 223d5 is finished, the reach sound area use flag 223m is set to OFF.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment.

  In this audio playback setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the reach voice being played has ended playing (S2341), and the reach voice has not been played so far or is still playing. If it is determined that the reproduction has not ended (S2341: No), then the first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 is displayed. It is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a normal reach sound reproduction stop command has been received (S2302).

  As a result, if the reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), it is then determined whether another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), the audio data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is stored from the audio data storage area 222. The data is read and set to the empty channel areas of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and the audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the sound reproduction setting process is terminated. If no other display command is received as a result of the processing of S2307 (S2307: No), the audio reproduction setting processing is terminated as it is.

  If the reach display command has been received as a result of the processing of S2302 (S2302: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the reach speech area busy flag 223m is off (S2342). As a result, if the reach voice area use flag 223m is off (S2342: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is converted into the 0th symbol normal reach in the audio data storage area 222a. Read out of the voice data 222a0, the first symbol probability change reach voice data 222a1, the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2,... To start the reach voice reproduction (S2343). Then, the reach audio area busy flag 223m is set to ON (S2344), and the audio reproduction setting process is terminated.

  As a result of the processing of S2342, when the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is on (S2342: No), the received reach display command is deleted (S2335), and the audio reproduction setting processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S2341 that the reach voice being played so far has finished playing (S2341: Yes), the reach voice area use flag 223m is set to off (S2346), The playback setting process ends.

  Here, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first establishes probability variation reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the sound lamp control device 113. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol set, and then a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability change reach, the reach design that has established probability reach by the sound reproduction setting process. The audio data for reproducing the probability variation reach sound corresponding to (main symbol) is set in the reach sound area 223d5, and the reproduction of the probability variation reach sound is started. At this time, the reach voice area 223d5 remains in use until the reproduction of the probability variation reach voice ends, and the reach voice area use flag 223m is turned on.

  Next, the audio lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design for which normal reach is established. This reach display command is used for the reach design command for which reach variation reach is established. This command is received immediately after receiving the reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type. That is, when a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received together with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach, the reach speech area 223d5 is in use, and the reach speech area use flag 223m is set. Is on. As a result, the reach display command is ignored and the normal reach sound is not output.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the sound lamp control device displays a command for notifying “establishment of probability change reach” as the display content of the third symbol display device, When the display control device receives a command to notify “reach establishment”, the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound are superimposed and output from the sound output device. However, as described above, when the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it was difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is possible to make each reach sound easy to hear by outputting the words that are produced by each sound in the probability-variable reach sound and the normal reach sound. The timing of the words to be uttered must be synchronized, and each reach voice becomes uniform with only different voices and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, it is necessary to reproduce the output of each reach sound in a strictly synchronized manner, and to output the words that are uttered by each sound completely in time, and the control becomes complicated. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probability variation symbol) that establish double reach, There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach display command received first. While the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by is output, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use, and the next reach display command received is ignored. That is, the normal reach sound is not output by the reach display command received later. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, when double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established probability variation reach, and thereafter Immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach, and the audio lamp control device 113 follows the reach display command received earlier. Only the reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (as a result, the probability change reach sound) is output. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the probability change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed, the player can hear only the probability change reach sound. In other words, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in processing load, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the normal reach sound is not reproduced at all. Therefore, the normal reach sound does not require the 20 millisecond silent section as in the first to third embodiments. Similar to the probability-variable reach voice, when the normal reach voice starts to be played, it is possible to immediately play a voiced section such as “Leach!”. Therefore, even when the normal reach is displayed as the single reach on the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced, it is possible to immediately reproduce the sound “Reach is!”.

  The “third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “identification information” described in the claims. “Big jackpot” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “predetermined game value” described in the claims, and “normal jackpot” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “first game” in the claims. Corresponding to “value”, “probability jackpot” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “second game value” described in the claims. The “normal reach” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first rendering mode” described in the claims, and the “probability reach” described in the above embodiments is the “second reach” described in the claims. "Double Reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "Third Effect Mode" described in the claims. The “normal reach speech” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first speech” described in the claims, and the “probability reach speech” described in the above embodiments is the “first speech” described in the claims. 2 ". “Normal” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “first state” described in the claims, and “During probable change” and “During time reduction” described in the above embodiments are described in the claims. This corresponds to the “second state”.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first to third embodiments, a case where the number of reach sounds being reproduced is counted between 0 and 2 in the reach sound reproduction counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. However, the reach sound reproduction counter 223c may be a 1-bit counter. In this case, the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. When a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is received from the display control device 114 and playback of reach sound is started, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the value of the reach sound playback counter 223c.

  Here, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that has established probability variation reach. Then, immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach design that established normal reach. Therefore, in this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that established the second normal reach, the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is 0. It becomes.

  The sound lamp control device 113 starts the reach sound reproduction, adds 1 to the reach sound reproduction counter 223c, and then checks the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c. It is determined that two reach sounds have been played, and the most recently played reach sound, that is, the normal reach sound that has been started later is stopped, or the normal reach sound that has been started later is The silence data is overwritten on the audio data set in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d for reproduction. Or, when a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114, if the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is 0, it is determined that two reach sounds are being reproduced, and the most recent reproduction is performed. To the audio data set in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d in order to stop the reproduction of the reached reach sound, that is, the normal reach sound started to be played later or to play the normal reach sound started to be played later. On the other hand, silent data is overwritten.

  Also by these, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  When the reach sound reproduction counter 223c is a 1-bit counter, the reach sound reproduction counter 223c receives other display commands than the reach display command from the display control device 114 by the sound lamp control device 113. In such a case, it may be initialized to “0”.

  In the second embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach sound reproduction stop command from the display control device 114 and determines that the two reach sounds are being reproduced, the sound lamp control device 113 reproduces the sound most recently. The case of stopping the playback of the reach voice, that is, the normal reach voice started to be played back later has been described, but the playback voice data is not used to play back the normal reach voice started to be played back instead of stopping the playback. Silence data may be overwritten on the audio data set in the storage area 223d. Also by this, as with the second embodiment, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  In the first to third embodiments, the case where the normal reach sound is reproduced in the sound lamp control device 113 has been described for the case where the silence period is 20 milliseconds after the start of reproduction. The time length need not necessarily be 20 milliseconds. When double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the time required for the sound lamp control device 113 to stop playback after the start of playback of the normal reach sound, or the playback of the normal reach sound. If the voice data set in the playback voice data storage area 223d for starting playback of the normal reach voice is longer than the time required to be overwritten with silence data, the silence period of the normal reach voice is 20 It may be shorter or longer than milliseconds.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a reach display command from the display control device 114, all display commands from the display control device 114 are displayed for 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach sound reproduction. Although the case of ignoring has been described, the time for ignoring the display command does not necessarily have to be 20 milliseconds. When the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sound lamp control device 113 starts reproduction of the probability change reach sound based on the first reach display command transmitted from the display control device 114. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the second reach display command transmitted from the display control device 114 (reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that established the normal reach). The time for ignoring the display command may be arbitrarily long as long as it is longer than the time required for the determination.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a reach display command from the display control device 114, all display commands from the display control device 114 are ignored for a predetermined time after the start of the reach sound reproduction. However, only the reach display command may be ignored for a predetermined time after the start of the reach voice reproduction, or only a part of the commands including the reach display command may be ignored. You may comprise as follows. Also in this case, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  In the first to third embodiments, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first notifies reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established probability variation reach. The reach display command is transmitted, and then the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach immediately, but two reach display commands are transmitted. The order may be reversed. That is, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach design that established normal reach, After that, the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment may be transmitted together with the type of the reach design that established the normal reach immediately. In this case, as a modification of the first embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that two reach sounds are being played back, the normal reach sound that has been played first is reproduced. The reach voice may be stopped while the silent section is being reproduced. Alternatively, as a modification of the second embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 first plays back if two reach sounds are being played when the normal reach sound play stop command is received from the display control device 114. You may make it stop reproduction | regeneration of the started normal reach sound, while the normal reach sound is reproducing | regenerating a silence area. Alternatively, as a modification of the third embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that two reach sounds are being reproduced, the reproduced sound is used to reproduce the normal reach sound that has been started first. The sound data set in the data storage area 223d may be overwritten with silence data. Also in this case, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound can be heard by the player.

  In each of the above embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 has four sound reproduction channels and is configured to be able to reproduce sound for four channels. However, the sound lamp control device 113 is not necessarily limited to this. 113 may have a plurality of sound reproduction channels and be configured to be able to reproduce sound for a plurality of channels.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the game state is normal, the passing of a ball to the second through gate 670 on the right side of the game board is monitored, and at least three balls are in the second through gate in 10 seconds. The case where it is determined that the player is hitting right after passing 670 has been described. However, the determination condition for right-handed is an example, and a ball having a predetermined number of balls of 2 or more is second in a predetermined time. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may be judged that the player is hitting right when it passes through the through gate 670.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the gaming state is in the midst of probability change or time reduction, the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 67 on the left side of the game board is monitored, and at least three spheres are detected in 10 seconds. The case where it is determined that the player is left-handed when passing through the first through gate 67 has been described. However, the left-handed judgment condition is an example, and a predetermined number of balls of two or more is required during a predetermined time. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that when a ball | bowl passes the 1st through gate 67, it judges that the player is left-handed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the left-handed or right-handed instruction given to the player is performed by displaying the hitting direction instruction screen on the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 10 has been described. The left-handed or right-handed instruction is not necessarily limited to the case where it is given by the display by the third symbol display device 81. A lamp (for example, a lamp in the shape of an arrow) that instructs left-handed or right-handed is used. It may be provided at a position that can be seen when the machine 10 is viewed from the front, and the player may be instructed to turn left or right by lighting or blinking the lamp. Also, a right-handed or left-handed instruction may be output from the voice output device 226 by voice.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the player is right-handed or left-handed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and display control is not necessarily performed. It may be performed by the device 114. In this case, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the first through-gate passage command from the main control device 110, the display lamp 114 indicates to the display control device 114 that the sphere has passed through the first through-gate 67. A through gate passing command may be transmitted. In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the second through gate passage command from the main control device 110, the display control device 114 indicates that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670. A gate passing command may be transmitted.

  Further, it may be determined by main controller 110 whether the player is hitting right or left. The main controller 110 originally grasps the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and a switch for detecting the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the passage of the ball of the second through gate 670 is also input. Therefore, main controller 110 can easily make the determination. In the main control device 110, when determining whether the player is right-handed or left-handed, the main control device 110 assumes that the player is right-handed while the game state is normal. If it is determined, a left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, and if it is determined that the player is left-handed while the gaming state is normal, the sound lamp control device A right-handed instruction screen display command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 via 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, if it is determined that the player is hitting right when the gaming state is normal, the player is instructed to make a left strike that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is changing or shortened. If it is determined that the player is left-handed in the middle, the case where the player is instructed to make a right-handed strike that is advantageous to the player has been described. However, the player can only play when the game state is normal. If it is determined that the player is hitting the right side, the player is instructed to make a left strike that is advantageous to the player. Good. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player is left-handed only when the game state is in the process of changing the probability or the time is short, the player is instructed to make a right-hand shot that is advantageous to the player, and the game state is normal. In this case, it is not necessary to instruct the player in the direction of the hitting ball. In particular, the player wants to gain more profit when the gaming state is in the process of being prone or short, so at least if the player is left-handed while the game state is in the probable or short period When the determination is made, the player can enter into a game in an advantageous state by instructing the player to make a right strike that is advantageous to the player.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, Display data table is prepared for each element such as “Fluctuation start-up”, “High-speed fluctuation”, “Notice effect”, “Normal reach”, “Super reach”, and according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may make it do. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every image display interval (one 20 ms in each of the above embodiments) for completing the drawing process. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which a rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image first developed from the other frame buffer. The case where information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, a frame on which a drawn image is to be developed. Alternatively, the buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9”, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the display data table has been described with respect to the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is specified corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. The display contents are not limited to those described above, and any display contents may be defined as long as they are defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since an image of one frame is displayed every time, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved series counter 223b is decreased by 1 ( Although the case of S2107 to S2109 in FIG. 25 has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the special control 1 of the main control device 110 is subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command being set by the variation start process (S1308). The special figure is set so that the value (NA) of the reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (see S1310 and S1305 in FIG. 16) is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is set, and the special figure 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be transmitted to the device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 more accurately. In this case, S2107 to S2109 in FIG. 25 are omitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, a display flag is generated, and based on the display flag, the audio data is read from the audio data storage area 222a and reproduced audio. The data storage area 223d may be set.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the winning at the first entrance 64, the winning at the second entrance 640, and the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are the maximum. Although it is configured to be held up to 4 times, the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . In addition, in some parts of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the second entrance 640 are: The display may be displayed in numbers or in a form (for example, color or lighting pattern) that is different from the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. The lamp may be separated from the first symbol display device 37. A light emitting member such as a light emitting member may be provided, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above-described embodiments, the variation effect that is a kind of dynamic display is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for controlling based on the control signal from the main control means, and the variable control accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the control of the sub-control means. Display means, and voice output means for outputting sound based on the display contents on the display means, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by a fluctuating effect performed by the display means. In a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming value is given to a player, the gaming machine is predetermined for the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode by a variation effect performed by the display means. The first game value is given as the game value of the game, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode by the variation effect performed by the display means, the first game value is given to the player as the predetermined game value. Game price A first game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first display means that the display means may be stopped and displayed in the first display mode as an effect mode of the variation effect performed by the display means. A third effect that simultaneously shows the effect state, the second effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the second display mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode. A first sound that is output when the change effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display means, and a voice that is output by the sound output means. And the second sound output when the variation effect is performed in the second effect mode, and the sub-control means is the display unit and the variable effect is the third effect mode. When the second is performed from the audio output means. Gaming machine A1, characterized in that for outputting audio.

  According to the gaming machine A1, main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and control is performed by the sub-control means based on the control signal from the main control means. Under the control of the sub-control means, a variation effect accompanied by dynamic display of identification information is performed by the display means, and sound is output from the sound output means based on the display content on the display means.

  In this gaming machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode by the variation effect performed in the display mode, the first game value is given to the player as the predetermined game value. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in the variation effect performed in the display mode, the second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value as the predetermined game value for the player Value is added. Moreover, as the production mode of the variable production performed by the display means, the first production mode indicating that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the first display mode, and the second display mode may be stopped and displayed. A second effect mode indicating that there is a characteristic, and a third effect mode that simultaneously indicates the first effect mode and the second effect mode are included. Further, when the changing effect is performed in the first effect mode on the display means, the first sound is output from the audio output means, and the changing effect is performed in the second effect mode on the display means. The second sound is output from the sound output means.

  Here, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, that is, when the variable effect is performed in the effect mode in which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are simultaneously shown, Only the second sound is output from the sound output means by the control means, and the first sound is not output. Accordingly, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display unit, the player listens to the same second sound as that in the case where the variation effect is performed in the second display mode, whereby the player It is possible to enhance the expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the game is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub-control unit includes a display control unit that controls display on the display unit, and a voice control unit that controls output of voice in the voice output unit, and the display control unit includes the display control unit. Notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the means, the notification means, when performing the variation effect in the third effect mode on the display means, as the display content in the display means, The second effect mode and the first effect mode are notified to the voice control unit, and the voice control unit outputs based on the display content on the display unit notified from the notification unit. From the output control means for selecting the sound to be output and starting the output, and the notification means, as the display content on the display means, the second effect mode and the first effect When the output of the second sound and the first sound as the sound to be output is started by the output control means based on the notification of the state, the output of the first sound A gaming machine A2 comprising stop means for stopping the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the display of the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub-control means, and the sound output of the sound output means is controlled by the sound control means provided in the sub-control means. The display contents on the display means are notified to the sound control means by the notification means provided on the display control means. Then, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects the sound to be output based on the display content on the display means notified from the notification means, and starts output.

  Here, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display unit, the second effect mode and the first effect mode are controlled by the notification unit of the display control unit as the display contents on the display unit. The means is notified. When the output control means of the sound control means outputs the second sound and the first sound as the sound to be output, the output of the first sound is stopped by the stop means. As a result, the sound control means performs control to select and output the sound to be output based on the display content on the display means notified from the notification means of the display control means. When the second sound and the first sound are output, the output of the first sound is stopped. Therefore, when the changing effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display unit, the second sound is output. Only audio can be output. Therefore, since the feeling of expectation that the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is an effect. Further, since the output of the sound is started first based on the notification of the display content from the notification means of the display control means, it is not necessary to determine the presence or absence of the sound output based on the display content notified from the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. Further, there is an effect that voice output based on the display content notified from the notification means can be performed immediately.

  In the gaming machine A2, when the notification means performs the variation effect on the display means in the third effect mode, first, as the display content on the display means, the second effect mode is set to the voice control unit. To the audio control unit, and the output control unit outputs the audio to be output in the order of display contents on the display unit notified from the notification unit. The game machine A3 is characterized by selecting and starting output.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the variation effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, first, the second effect mode is notified to the sound control unit by the notification unit as the display contents on the display unit, and then the first effect is performed. The mode is notified to the voice control unit by the notification unit. Further, since the sound to be output is selected and output by the output control means in the order of display contents notified from the notification means, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, First, output of the second sound is started, and then output of the first sound is started. Thereafter, the output of the first sound is stopped by the stopping means. As a result, it is possible to start outputting the second sound to be output when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode before the first sound whose output is stopped. When the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  The gaming machine A4 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, wherein the first voice outputs a voice in a silent state for a predetermined time after the voice output is started.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. In other words, since the first sound is a sound that is silenced for a predetermined time after the start of the sound output, when the changing effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, Even if the output of the second sound and the first sound is started as the sound to be output, a sound in a silent state is output from the first sound. Therefore, even if the first sound is output for a moment by stopping the output of the first sound before the predetermined time elapses after the output of the first sound is started, There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it is heard as noise.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub-control unit includes a display control unit that controls display on the display unit, and a voice control unit that controls output of voice in the voice output unit, and the display control unit includes the display control unit. Notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the means, the notification means, when performing the variation effect in the third effect mode on the display means, as the display content in the display means, The second effect mode and the first effect mode are notified to the voice control unit, and the voice control unit outputs based on the display content on the display unit notified from the notification unit. From the output control means for selecting the sound to be output and starting the output, and the notification means, as the display content on the display means, the second effect mode and the first effect When the output of the second sound and the first sound as the sound to be output is started by the output control means based on the notification of the state, the first sound is silenced. A gaming machine B1 comprising rewriting means for rewriting and outputting the voice in a state.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the display of the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub-control means, and the sound output of the sound output means is controlled by the sound control means provided in the sub-control means. The display contents on the display means are notified to the sound control means by the notification means provided on the display control means. Then, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects the sound to be output based on the display content on the display means notified from the notification means, and starts output.

  Here, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display unit, the second effect mode and the first effect mode are controlled by the notification unit of the display control unit as the display contents on the display unit. The means is notified. Then, when the output of the second sound and the first sound is output as the sound to be output by the output control means of the sound control means, the output of the first sound is converted to the silent sound by the rewriting means. It is rewritten and output. As a result, the sound control means performs control to select and output the sound to be output based on the display content on the display means notified from the notification means of the display control means. When the second sound and the first sound are output, the output of the first sound is rewritten to the sound in the silent state and output, so that the varying effect is displayed in the third effect mode on the display means. When performed, the player can be told that only the second voice has been output. Therefore, since the feeling of expectation that the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is an effect. Also, since the output of the sound is first started based on the notification of the display content from the notification means of the display control means, the sound output based on the display content notified from the notification means can be immediately performed. There is.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the notification means performs the variation effect on the display means in the third effect mode, first, the display device displays the second effect mode as the voice control unit. To the audio control unit, and the output control unit outputs the audio to be output in the order of display contents on the display unit notified from the notification unit. The game machine B2 is characterized by selecting and starting output.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the variation effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, first, the second effect mode is notified to the sound control unit by the notification unit as the display contents on the display unit, and then the first effect is performed. The mode is notified to the voice control unit by the notification unit. Further, since the sound to be output is selected and output by the output control means in the order of display contents notified from the notification means, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, First, output of the second sound is started, and then output of the first sound is started. Thereafter, the first sound is rewritten by the rewriting means into a silent sound and output. As a result, the output of the second sound that is to be heard by the player when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode is started before the first sound that is rewritten to a sound in a silent state. Therefore, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the first voice outputs a silent voice for a predetermined time after the voice output is started.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first sound is a sound that is originally silenced for a predetermined time after the output of the sound is started. Therefore, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display unit, Even when the output of the second sound and the first sound is started as the sound to be output, a sound in a silent state is output from the first sound. Therefore, the first sound is rewritten to a silent sound before the predetermined time elapses after the output of the first sound starts, so that the player hears the first sound as noise. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub-control unit includes a display control unit that controls display on the display unit, and a voice control unit that controls output of voice in the voice output unit, and the display control unit includes the display control unit. Notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content on the means, and the notification means, when performing the variation effect in the third effect mode on the display means, as the display content on the display means, , Notifying the sound control means of the second effect mode, and then notifying the sound control means of the first effect mode, wherein the sound control means is notified by the notification means. Based on the display content on the display means, the output control means for selecting the sound to be output and starting output, and the notification means as the display content on the display means. When the second effect mode is notified, a predetermined time after receiving the notification includes at least a non-accepting unit for notifying the first effect mode from the notifying unit. A gaming machine C1 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the display of the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub-control means, and the sound output of the sound output means is controlled by the sound control means provided in the sub-control means. The display contents on the display means are notified to the sound control means by the notification means provided on the display control means. Then, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects the sound to be output based on the display content on the display means notified from the notification means, and starts output.

  Here, when the variation effect is performed on the display unit in the third effect mode, first, the second effect mode is notified to the voice control unit by the notification unit as the display content on the display unit, and then the first effect is performed. The mode is notified to the voice control unit by the notification unit. On the other hand, in the voice control means, when the notification of the second effect form is received as the display content on the display means from the notification means, at least the first effect form from the notification means is received for a predetermined time after the notification is received. The notification is put into a non-acceptance state by the non-acceptance means. Thereby, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, only the second sound can be output by the output control means of the sound control means. Therefore, since the feeling of expectation that the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is an effect. In this case, since the output of the first sound is not performed at all, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, since the output of the second sound that will be heard by the player when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode can be started immediately, the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode. Thus, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub-control unit includes a display control unit that controls display on the display unit, and a voice control unit that controls output of voice in the voice output unit, and the display control unit includes the display control unit. Notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content on the means, and the notification means, when performing the variation effect in the third effect mode on the display means, as the display content on the display means, , Notifying the sound control means of the second effect mode, and then notifying the sound control means of the first effect mode, wherein the sound control means is notified by the notification means. Based on the display content on the display means, the output control means for selecting the sound to be output and starting the output; the first effect mode or the second from the notification means When the output control means selects the first voice or the second voice as the voice to be output based on the notification of the output mode, the first voice for outputting the first voice is output. Storage means for storing the first voice data or the second voice data for outputting the second voice, and the second output data by the output control means based on the second voice data stored in the storage means. When the first presentation mode is notified from the notification means when the first voice data is output, the storage means is provided with storage control means for not storing the first voice data. A gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the display of the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub-control means, and the sound output of the sound output means is controlled by the sound control means provided in the sub-control means. The display contents on the display means are notified to the sound control means by the notification means provided on the display control means. Then, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects the sound to be output based on the display content on the display means notified from the notification means, and starts output.

  Here, when the variation effect is performed on the display unit in the third effect mode, first, the second effect mode is notified to the voice control unit by the notification unit as the display content on the display unit, and then the first effect is performed. The mode is notified to the voice control unit by the notification unit. Then, the second sound is first selected as the sound to be output by the output control means of the sound control means. Then, the second sound data for outputting the second sound is stored in the storage means. The storage means is configured to output the first sound or the second sound by the output control means based on the notification of the first effect mode or the second effect mode from the notification unit. When selected, the first voice data for outputting the first voice or the second voice data for outputting the second voice is stored. When the second sound is output from the output control means based on the second sound data stored in the storage means, the storage control means even if the first effect mode is notified from the notification means. Thus, the first sound data is not stored in the storage means. Thereby, when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, only the second sound can be output by the output control means of the sound control means. Therefore, since the feeling of expectation that the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given can be enhanced, the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is an effect. In this case, since the output of the first sound is not performed at all, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, since the output of the second sound that will be heard by the player when the variation effect is performed in the third effect mode can be started immediately, the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode. Thus, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  A game board, a launching means for launching a ball toward the game board, and a detecting means for detecting that the ball fired by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the game board; , A determination means for determining when the detection means detects that the ball has entered the teaching area, and a variation effect accompanied by a dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. In the gaming machine in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by a display effect performed by the display device and a variation effect performed by the display device, the start area is The game is configured by a first start area where a ball launched to the left of the game board is easy to enter and a second start area where a ball launched to the right of the game board is easy to enter, the game The machine is in the first state as the gaming state At least a second state, and if the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first start area is more than the case where the ball enters the second start area If the game state is the second state, the game when the ball enters the second start area is more effective than when the ball enters the first start area. The game machine further includes a first passing means through which at least a part of a ball flowing down to the left of the game board passes, and the gaming state is in the second state. In addition, the gaming state is changed to the second state by first detection means for detecting that two or more balls having passed through the first passage means during a predetermined time, and the first detection means. In a predetermined time, two or more spheres having a predetermined number of balls pass through the first passing means. If it is detected, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a first informing means for informing to fire toward the ball to the game board on the right side E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the detecting means detects that the ball launched toward the game board by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the game board, the detection is triggered. Is determined by the determination means. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, when the variation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information is performed on the display device, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the variation effect, the game A predetermined game value is given to the player.

  In this gaming machine, the start area includes a first start area where a ball launched to the left of the game board is easy to enter, and a second start area where a ball launched to the right of the game board is easy to enter. It is constituted by. In addition, this gaming board has at least a first state and a second state as gaming states. If the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first starting area works more favorably to the player than the case where the ball enters the second starting area, and the gaming state is the first state. In the two states, the player who works in the second starting area works more favorably to the player than the ball that enters the first starting area.

  Here, when the gaming state is in the second state, the first passing means through which at least a part of the sphere flowing down to the left of the game board passes is passed through the first passage means for a predetermined number of balls of two or more during a predetermined time When the first detecting means detects that the ball has passed, the first notifying means notifies that the ball is launched to the right of the game board. Thereby, although it is advantageous for the player that the game state is in the second state and it is advantageous for the player to enter the ball in the second starting area where the ball launched to the right of the game board is easy to enter. If there is a possibility that the game ball is being fired toward the left side of the game board, the player can be directed to launch the ball toward the right side of the game board. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enjoyed in an advantageous state for the player.

  Also, since a notification is sent to the player to launch the ball toward the right side of the game board only after two or more balls have passed through the first passage means for a predetermined time, Even though the player is firing a ball to the right of the game board, some of the balls have flowed down to the left of the game board, so that the ball has passed the first passage means , It is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of notifications directed to the player to launch the ball toward the right side of the game board. For example, even if the player is firing a ball toward the left of the game board, the ball is not passed until two or more balls have passed through the first passage means for a predetermined time. By notifying the player to fire the player toward the right side of the game board, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of the notification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being hindered by appropriately performing the notification of the launch direction of the sphere and the frequent occurrence of the notification.

  A game board, a launching means for launching a ball toward the game board, and a detecting means for detecting that the ball fired by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the game board; , A determination means for determining when the detection means detects that the ball has entered the teaching area, and a variation effect accompanied by a dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. In the gaming machine in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by a display effect performed by the display device and a variation effect performed by the display device, the start area is The game is configured by a first start area where a ball launched to the left of the game board is easy to enter and a second start area where a ball launched to the right of the game board is easy to enter, the game The machine is in the first state as the gaming state At least a second state, and if the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first start area is more than the case where the ball enters the second start area If the game state is the second state, the game when the ball enters the second start area is more effective than when the ball enters the first start area. The gaming machine further includes second passing means through which at least a part of a ball flowing down to the right of the gaming board passes, and the gaming state is in the first state. And a second detection means for detecting that two or more spheres having passed through the second passage means for a predetermined time, and the gaming state is changed to the first state by the second detection means. In a predetermined time, two or more spheres having a predetermined number of balls pass through the second passing means. If is detected, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a second informing means for informing to fire toward the ball to the left of the game board E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, when the detection means detects that the ball launched toward the game board by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the game board, the detection is triggered. Is determined by the determination means. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, when the variation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information is performed on the display device, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by the variation effect, the game A predetermined game value is given to the player.

  In this gaming machine, the start area includes a first start area where a ball launched to the left of the game board is easy to enter, and a second start area where a ball launched to the right of the game board is easy to enter. It is constituted by. In addition, this gaming board has at least a first state and a second state as gaming states. If the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first starting area works more favorably to the player than the case where the ball enters the second starting area, and the gaming state is the first state. In the two states, the player who works in the second starting area works more favorably to the player than the ball that enters the first starting area.

  Here, when the gaming state is in the first state, the second passing means through which at least a part of the sphere flowing down to the right of the game board passes is passed through a second number of balls having a predetermined number of balls of two or more during a predetermined time. When the second detection means detects that the ball has passed, the second notification means notifies that the ball is fired toward the left of the game board. Thereby, although it is advantageous for the player that the game state is in the first state and it is advantageous for the player to enter the ball in the first starting area where the ball launched to the left of the game board is easy to enter. If there is a possibility that the game ball is being fired toward the right side of the game board, the player can be directed to launch the ball toward the left side of the game board. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enjoyed in an advantageous state for the player.

  In addition, since a notification is made to direct the player to fire the ball toward the left of the game board only after two or more balls have passed through the second passage means for a predetermined time, Even though the player is firing a ball to the left of the game board, some of the balls have flowed down to the right of the game board, so that the ball has passed the second passing means , It is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of notifications directed to the player to launch the ball toward the left side of the game board. For example, even if the player is firing a ball to the right of the game board, it is not until a ball having a predetermined number of balls of two or more passes through the second passage means for a predetermined time. By notifying the player to fire the player toward the left side of the game board, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of the notification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being hindered by appropriately performing the notification of the launch direction of the sphere and the frequent occurrence of the notification.

  A gaming machine F1, wherein in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, and E2, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, and E2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and the gaming machine F2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, and E2, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that starts when a ball enters the starting entrance (start winning prize). For example, the effective display area has three horizontally or vertically, or 3 × 3 cells. A total of nine symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling stops, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. A big hit is generated (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-272159).
In addition, during the scrolling of symbols and the like, there are sometimes interesting effects (for example, effects by reach display, etc.) that suggest in advance that the game state (for example, jackpot) is advantageous to the player. A device has been devised to give players a sense of expectation for games. Furthermore, in the production by reach display, so-called double reach display is performed, not only to suggest that it will be a big hit, but depending on the stop pattern when scrolling stops, the probability of a big hit after the big hit will be high? There is also a game machine where the production is expected to be rejected.
In a conventional gaming machine, when a reach display is performed, there is a game machine in which a different reach sound is prepared depending on a design that achieves the reach display. In this type of gaming machine, when a reach occurs in a plurality of symbols due to a double reach display or the like, a reach sound corresponding to each symbol is output, but the reach sound is not necessarily considered in consideration of the player's interests. It was not output.
The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing sound output in consideration of the interest of the player.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 64 1st entrance (1st starting area)
67 First through gate (first passage means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
112a Ball launch unit (ball launcher)
113 sound lamp control device (part of sub-control means, sound control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub-control means, display control means)
223d5 reach audio area (storage means)
226 Audio output device (audio output means)
640 Second entrance (second start area)
670 Second through gate (second passage means)
S1201, S1206 (detection means)
S1308 Fluctuation start processing (determination means)
S1916 Sound reproduction setting process (output control means)
S2204 to S2207, S2210 (second detection means)
S2208 (second notification means)
S2212-S2215, S2218 (first detection means)
S2216 (first notification means)
S2305 (stop means)
S2321 (rewriting means)
S2334 (Non-reception means)
S2342: No (storage control means)
S2603 (notification means)

Claims (1)

The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for controlling based on the control signal from the main control means, and the variable control accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the control of the sub-control means. Display means and voice output means for outputting sound, and the player has a predetermined game value when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by a variation effect performed by the display means. In the gaming machine that is granted,
The gaming machine
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode by the variation effect performed by the display means, a first game value is given to the player as a predetermined game value,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode due to the fluctuating effect performed by the display means, a second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first game value is given to the player as a predetermined game value. Game value,
As an effect mode of the change effect performed by the display means,
A first rendering mode indicating that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the first display mode;
A second presentation mode indicating that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the second display mode;
A third effect mode that simultaneously shows the first effect mode and the second effect mode;
As the sound output by the sound output means,
A first sound that is output when the variation effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display means;
A second sound that is output when the variation effect is performed in the second effect mode on the display means,
The first voice is a voice that is silent for a predetermined time after the voice output is started,
The sub-control means is
Display control means for controlling display in the display means;
Voice control means for controlling the output of voice in the voice output means,
The display control means includes a notification means for notifying the voice control means of information indicating display contents on the display means,
The notification means, when performing the variation effect in the third effect mode on the display means, first, as the information indicating the display contents on the display means, information indicating the second effect mode is the voice Notifying the control means, and then notifying the voice control means of information indicating the first effect mode,
The voice control means is
Means for starting output of the second sound when information indicating the second effect mode is notified from the notification means;
Means for starting output of the first sound when information indicating the first effect mode is notified from the notification means;
Means for determining whether or not the second sound is output after starting the output of the first sound;
When it is determined that the second sound is output by the means, the output of the first sound is stopped until the predetermined time elapses after the output of the first sound is started. And a gaming machine.

Images